Paydirt SiteWork User's Guide 5.2

Paydirt SiteWork
User Guide
F
5475 Kellenberger Road
Dayton, OH 45424-1099
(937) 245-5600 (800) 538-7800
FAX (937) 233-9004
www.trimble.com
Version 5.2
Part Number 0320-0700-02
December 2004
Corporate Office Trimble's relevant operator's manual and specifications,
Trimble Navigation Limited and; (ii) the Products and Software are not modified or
5475 Kellenburger Road misused. The preceding warranties shall not apply to,
Dayton, Ohio 45424-1099 and Trimble shall not be responsible for defects or
U.S.A. performance problems resulting from (i) the
combination or utilization of the Product or Software
800-538-7800 (Toll Free in U.S.A.) with hardware or software products, information, data,
+1-937-245-5600 Phone systems, interfacing or devices not made, supplied or
+1-937-233-9004 Fax specified by Trimble; (ii) the operation of the Product or
www.trimble.com Software under any specification other than, or in
Copyright and Trademarks addition to, Trimble's standard specifications for its
Copyright © 1988-2004, Trimble Navigation Limited. products; (iii) the unauthorized modification or use of
the Product or Software; (iv) damage caused by
All rights reserved. accident, lightning or other electrical discharge, fresh or
Trimble, the Globe & Triangle logo, the Sextant logo salt water immersion or spray; or (v) normal wear and
with Trimble, and Paydirt are trademarks of Trimble tear on consumable parts (e.g., batteries).
Navigation Limited, registered in the United States THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLE'S ENTIRE
Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries. LIABILITY, AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES,
All other trademarks are the property of their respective RELATING TO PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS
owners. AND SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS,
Release Notice SOFTWARE, AND ACCOMPANYING
This is the December 2004 release of the Paydirt DOCUMENTATION AND MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED
SiteWork User Guide, part number 0320-0700-02. It “AS-IS” AND WITHOUT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
applies to version 5.2 of the Paydirt software. WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER TRIMBLE
NAVIGATION LIMITED OR ANYONE WHO HAS BEEN
Software License, Limited Warranty INVOLVED IN ITS CREATION, PRODUCTION,
This Trimble software product, whether provided as a INSTALLATION, OR DISTRIBUTION INCLUDING, BUT
stand-alone computer software product, built into NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
hardware circuitry as firmware, embedded in flash MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
memory, or stored on magnetic or other media, (the PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
“Software”) is licensed and not sold, and its use is NONINFRINGEMENT. THE STATED EXPRESS
governed by the terms of the relevant End User License WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL
Agreement (“EULA”) included with the Software. In the OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART
absence of a separate EULA included with the Software OF TRIMBLE ARISING OUT OF, OR IN
providing different limited warranty terms, exclusions CONNECTION WITH, ANY PRODUCTS OR
and limitations, the following terms and conditions shall SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND
apply. Trimble warrants that this Trimble Software JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS
product will substantially conform to Trimble’s ON DURATION OR THE EXCLUSION OF AN
applicable published specifications for the Software for IMPLIED WARRANTY, SO THE ABOVE
a period of ninety (90) days, starting from the date of LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
delivery. TRIMBLE NAVIGATION LIMITED IS NOT
RESPONSIBLE FOR THE OPERATION OR
Warranty Remedies FAILURE OF OPERATION OF GPS SATELLITES OR
Trimble's sole liability and your exclusive remedy under THE AVAILABILITY OF GPS SATELLITE
the warranties set forth above shall be, at Trimble’s SIGNALS.
option, to repair or replace any Product or Software that
fails to conform to such warranty ("Nonconforming Limitation of Liability
Product") or refund the purchase price paid by you for TRIMBLE’S ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY
any such Nonconforming Product, upon your return of PROVISION HEREIN SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
any Nonconforming Product to Trimble in accordance AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE PRODUCT OR
with Trimble’s standard return material authorization SOFTWARE LICENSE. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
procedures. PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT
SHALL TRIMBLE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR
Warranty Exclusions and Disclaimer ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
These warranties shall be applied only in the event and CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER UNDER
to the extent that the Products and Software are properly ANY CIRCUMSTANCE OR LEGAL THEORY RELATING
and correctly installed, configured, interfaced, IN ANY WAY TO THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE AND
maintained, stored, and operated in accordance with ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND
MATERIALS, (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS
INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS),
REGARDLESS WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS
AND REGARDLESS OF THE COURSE OF DEALING
WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS DEVELOPED BETWEEN
YOU AND TRIMBLE. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
NOT WITHSTANDING THE ABOVE, IF YOU
PURCHASED THIS PRODUCT OR SOFTWARE IN
THE EUROPEAN UNION, THE ABOVE
WARRANTY PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY.
PLEASE CONTACT YOUR DEALER FOR
APPLICABLE WARRANTY INFORMATION.
Contents
About SiteWork
How SiteWork Works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
SiteWork’s Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
How to Use SiteWork’s Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxv
Your Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxv
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
1 Installing SiteWork
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Computing Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Attaching the Security Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Installing Paydirt SiteWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installing a Wintab Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Setting up the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Testing the Wintab Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Mapping a Toggle Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Uninstalling SiteWork. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Moving on in SiteWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2 Getting Started
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Starting SiteWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide v

Contents
Working with the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Exiting SiteWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Opening an Existing Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Backing Up Your Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
English versus Metric Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3 Using the Data Window

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Surface Data Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Working in the Surface Data Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Surface Data Edit Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting a Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Working in the Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Mouse Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Working with Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Changing Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Adding a Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Zooming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Mouse Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Zoom In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Zoom Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Zoom All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Relocate Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Copying Data to the Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Closing the Surface Data Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4 Digitizing Data
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Advantages to Digitizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Surfaces and Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
vi Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

Contents
Coordinates and Digitizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Your Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using Your Digitizer Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Toggling in SiteWork. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Setting up to Digitize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Digitizing Enclosed Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Areas of Interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Subgrade Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Pads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Sloping Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Digitizing Line Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Contour Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Sloping Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Digitizing Point Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Elevation Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Cut Stake Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Entering Substrata Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Copying Enclosed Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Setting up to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Copying a Subgrade Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Copying a Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Copying a Sloping Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Copying an AOI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Copying Line Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Multiple Surface Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Control Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Editing with a Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Differences between Mouse and Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Doing a Multiple-Page Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide v ii

Contents
5 Importing Data
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Advantages to Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Surfaces and Importing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Coordinates and Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
What Needs to be in an Imported File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Your Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Importing from Terramodel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Importing from a Total Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Importing a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
QuickPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6 Learning About Data Types

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
How Data Affects the Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Line Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Contour Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Sloping Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Point Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Elevation Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Boreholes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Enclosed Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Subgrade Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Sloping Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Pads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Areas of Interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Other Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cut Stake Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Control Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
viii Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

Contents
7 Editing Data: Changing What You’ve Done

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
About Changing What You’ve Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Editing Surface Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Setting up to Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Changing Point Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Changing Points on Lines of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Changing Sloping Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Changing Entities (Subgrade Adjustments, Pads, and AOIs) . . 161
Deleting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Setting up to Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Deleting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Deleting Lines of Data (Contour Lines and Sloping Lines) . . . 169
Deleting Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Copying Surfaces, Drawings, and Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Surface Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Drawing Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Project Save As. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Taking Good Project Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Changing General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Information about your Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Information about your Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Information about your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Changing the Drawing Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Wrong Scale: Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Wrong Scale: Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8 Using Report Windows

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
The Report Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Report Tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide ix

Contents
The Report Window Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

The Report Window Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
The Color Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Zooming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Zoom In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Zoom Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Zoom All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Changing What is in the Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Setting up How Your Mesh is Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Color vs. Gray Scale or Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Color Grid, Filled Grid, or None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Setting up How the Grid Should be Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Display Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Cut Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fill Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Net Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Saving Your Text Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Copying to the Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Managing Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Running a Report in the Same Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Opening Other Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Arranging Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Arranging Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Switching Between Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Closing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
9 Running the Reports

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
About SiteWork’s Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
The 3-D Views Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
x Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

Contents
Setting up the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

3-D View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Reference Square. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Rotating the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Translating the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Scaling the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Resetting the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
The Cut/Fill Locations Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Cut/Fill Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Staking Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Cut/Fill Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Areas Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Cut/Fill Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
The Grid Cell Values Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Grid Cell Values Report Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
The Grid Cell Volumes Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Grid Cell Volumes Report Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
The Surface Contours Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Surface Contours Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
The Cross Sections Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Cross Sections Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Digitizing Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Viewing Individual Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Deleting Digitized Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
The Areas and Volumes Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Areas and Volumes Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xi

Contents
The Project Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Project Summary Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
The Site Balance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Site Balance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Creating a Balanced Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
The Total Volumes Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
10 Using SiteWork to Your Advantage

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
About SiteWork’s Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Reports to Use When you Need to Verify Takeoff Accuracies . 281
Reports to Use When Preparing Your Bid . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Reports to Send Information to the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Reports to Use When Arguing a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
The 3-D Views Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Using 3-D Views to Verify Takeoff Accuracies . . . . . . . . . 283
Using 3-D Views to Prepare Your Bid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
The Cut/Fill Locations Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Using Cut/Fill Locations to Verify Takeoff Accuracies . . . . . 284
Using Cut/Fill Locations to Prepare Your Bid . . . . . . . . . . 285
Using Cut/Fill Locations to Take Information to the Field . . . 286
The Grid Cell Values Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Using Grid Cell Values to Verify Takeoff Accuracies . . . . . . 287
Using Grid Cell Values to Argue a Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
The Grid Cell Volumes Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Using Grid Cell Volumes to Verify Takeoff Accuracies . . . . . 288
Using Grid Cell Volumes to Argue a Point . . . . . . . . . . . 289
The Surface Contours Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Using Surface Contours to Verify Takeoff Accuracies . . . . . 290
Using Surface Contours to Prepare Your Bid . . . . . . . . . . 290
The Cross Sections Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
xii Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

Contents
Using Cross Sections to Verify Takeoff Accuracies . . . . . . . 291

Using Cross Sections to Prepare Your Bid . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
The Areas and Volumes Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Using Areas and Volumes to Verify Takeoff Accuracies . . . . 293
Using Areas and Volumes to Prepare Your Bid . . . . . . . . . 293
The Project Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Using Project Summary to Prepare Your Bid . . . . . . . . . . 294
Using Project Summary to Send Information to the Field . . . . 295
The Site Balance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Using Site Balance to Prepare Your Bid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
The Total Volumes Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Using Total Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
11 Exporting
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
About Exporting in SiteWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Advantages to Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Surfaces and Exporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Coordinates and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
What Information is Exported? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Exporting to Terramodel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Exporting to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Sending to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Exporting to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
12 Printing
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Printing in SiteWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Print Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Printing a Surface’s Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xiii

Contents
Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Report Setup Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Changing the Report Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Changing the Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
13 Working with Paydirt SiteWork Projects

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
How to Manage Your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating New Surfaces and Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Adding a Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Add a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Switching Between Parts of Your Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Open Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Open Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Deleting Unwanted Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Delete Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Delete Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Delete Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Archiving and Restoring Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
14 Customizing Paydirt SiteWork

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
How to Customize SiteWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Setting Your Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Default Drawing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Default Surface Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
xiv Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

Contents
Report Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Show Options, Colors, and Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Setting Up Your Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Remapping Cursor Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Configuring Stream Filter Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Testing Communication with the Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Coordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Confirm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Grid Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Subgrade Adjustments Under Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Reset All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Choosing What to Show or Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Status Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Group Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
15 Math Tools
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Starting Math Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Starting Math Tools from SiteWork’s Plan Data Window . . . . 375
Starting Math Tools from SiteWork’s Project Window . . . . . 378
Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Entering Data Using Your Digitizer and Mouse . . . . . . . . . 379
Storing Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Storing Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Storing Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Zooming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Zoom In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Zoom Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xv

Contents
Zoom All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Mouse Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Seeing Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Outputting the Data or the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Saving the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Copying the Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
When you are Finished with a Math Tools Session. . . . . . . . . . . 399
New Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Saving the Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Clearing the Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Exiting Math Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Customizing Math Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Changing the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Displaying the Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Displaying the Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
16 Using SiteWork’s Calculators

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
About SiteWork’s Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Area Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Calculating a Rectangular Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Calculating a Circular Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Calculating a Trapezoidal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Printing the Area Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Haul Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
To Calculate a Haul: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
xvi Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

Contents
Trench Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Windows Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
17 Converting from DOS to Windows

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Converting Your DOS-Version Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
18 Troubleshooting
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Problems When Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Problems When Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Problems When Running or Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Index
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xv ii

Contents
xviii Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

About SiteWork
Congratulations on your purchase of Paydirt SiteWork, and welcome
to the Paydirt family. SiteWork for Windows is a highly-accurate,
earthwork-calculation tool that lets you analyze and estimate a job site
quickly and effectively. It is useful for contractors doing utility,
excavation, highway, heavy, and general construction work. It
eliminates the need for doing tedious hand calculations when you
calculate volumes of dirt that need to be moved.
How SiteWork Works

You trace surface contours, building pads, parking lot and other
surface elevations for both the Existing and Proposed surfaces. You
also outline boundaries for topsoil strip, asphalt, sub-base and other
materials to adjust finished grade elevations to subgrade. Then Paydirt
SiteWork generates a grid model of each surface to provide you with
excavation areas, volumes, cut/fill locations, and material quantities.
You spend your time putting your bid together rather than crunching
numbers.
Paydirt SiteWork's data types provide you with the tools you need to
quickly and easily create accurate surface models. Chapter 6,
Learning About Data Types explains these data types and how they
help build surface models.
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xix

About SiteWork
SiteWork’s Features
SiteWork's professional-quality reports can help you find data-input
mistakes, present evidence to support the details of your bid, take the
information to the field, and present evidence if you have a point of
argument after you get into the job. See Chapters 8, 9, and 10 for an
in-depth look at SiteWork's reports.
You can also export information you created or modified in SiteWork
to a file to download into your total station. If you own a Geodimeter,
Geodat, or Constructor, you can download a surface directly from
SiteWork to your device. See Chapter 11, Exporting for an in-depth
look at how to export your data.
SiteWork does not stop with the basics of site estimation. SiteWork
also has Math Tools (a planimeter tool that lets you quickly calculate
areas, counts, and lengths), CalcWork (an optional companion
application that can help you determine how much of each material
you will need and how much each material will cost), an area
calculator, a haul calculator, and a trench calculator.
SiteWork follows Windows® software standards. For example:
• You can press [Enter] on your keyboard or cursor instead of
clicking OK when you are in a dialog box.
• You can press the [Esc] key on your keyboard instead of
clicking Cancel when you are in a dialog box.
• Buttons in dialog boxes all have hot keys and default values.
• Most edit boxes have hot keys.
SiteWork also has extensive documentation to help you if you have
any questions.
xx Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

About SiteWork
How to Use SiteWork’s Documentation

SiteWork comes with this user's guide, a tutorial, and online help.
About this manual

This manual explains how to use SiteWork and describes all of
SiteWork's features, including Math Tools. To get the most out of
SiteWork for Windows, use one of the following schedules:
Type of User Chapters You Should Read
New User 1-16
Experienced User 1,3,6,8-10, 12,15
DOS to Windows User 1-17
User Having SiteWork 18

Trouble
When you have read the appropriate chapters, put this manual in a safe
place near the computer running SiteWork for Windows for use as a
reference.
This manual is a complete user's guide. It was written with the
beginning user in mind, but it also explains advanced options and
techniques as well. If you have suggestions on how this manual or any
other Trimble manual can be improved, please contact technical
support.
This manual was designed to help you understand how to use
SiteWork to your best advantage, no matter what your level of
computer and SiteWork experience is. It provides you with step-by-
step instructions and detailed explanations of all of SiteWork's
features. This manual assumes you have some estimating
experience.
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xxi

About SiteWork
We have made every effort to make sure this manual, the online help,
and the tutorial accurately represent the SiteWork for Windows
product. However, due to printing schedules and other factors, the
program may have undergone some last-minute changes after this
manual was printed. Please read the README file and any change
sheets that come as part of the documentation for this product.
To help keep customer costs low, we do full updates of the manual
only when necessary. When you receive upgrades to SiteWork for
Windows, release notes will document the changes we have made to
the product. Keep any release notes you receive near this manual for
future reference.
About the tutorial

If you are new to using SiteWork or if you need a refresher in
digitizing basics, follow the tutorial included with your SiteWork
package.
The tutorial shows you the steps for doing a basic takeoff in SiteWork.
It takes you step-by-step from starting SiteWork to setting up a project
to doing the takeoff to using the reports. It explains some special
digitizing situations and includes basic definitions of some of the
terms used in the tutorial.
About SiteWork’s online help

SiteWork's online help is set up to give you instant guidance as you
use SiteWork. It is set up by menus and by topic. It has an extensive
index to help you quickly find the topic you need. Help offers
explanations of what each option, dialog box, and button can do and
tells you how to use it.
xxii Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

About SiteWork
To get help on a menu option:

1. Press [F1] with the desired menu option highlighted.
To get help in a dialog box:

1. Click the Help button in the dialog box.
OR
Press [F1].
To open the help system from the menus:

Select Help / Contents. SiteWork’s help system opens up with
the Contents page. You can find answers to your questions
using the contents page and the index.
When you open SiteWork's Help system from the menus, you will see
SiteWork for Windows Help dialog box. Select Help topics by
clicking on them in the contents tree view on the left of the dialog box.
The Help topic will be displayed in the window on the right side of the
dialog box. Double-click on a book to see what topics are available in
the book.
More help is available for both text and graphics (pictures of dialog
boxes) within the help file. When you are using help, your cursor will
change to a as it passes over an item any time more help is
available. If you want more help, click on the item. When you click for
more help, the help will either jump to a new topic or it will bring up a
small pop-up help screen. To go back to the original topic after
jumping to a new one, click the Back button at the top of the help
screen. To go back to the original topic after a pop up appears, click
anywhere.
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide x xi ii

About SiteWork
Click the Contents tab to view the contents page.

Click the Index tab to view the help index.
Click the Search tab to search for a specific phrase.
Click on a topic to view that help topic.
Double-click on a book to open it.
Figure A: The Help Topics dialog box.
Windows Help
You can also open up the Windows Help system that was installed on
your computer with your operating system.
To open Window's help:

Select Help / Search for Help On.
xxiv Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

About SiteWork
These manuals are also available in an electronic portable document

format (PDF) on the Paydirt SiteWork installation CD.
Other sources of related information are:
• Readme.txt file – a Readme.txt file contains information added
after the documentation was completed. To read this file,
double-click it or use a text editor to open it. The installation
program also copies it into the program directory.
• Release notes – the release notes describe new features of the
product, information not included in the manuals, and any
changes to the manuals. They are provided as a .doc file on the
CD and are installed in the program directory (typically
C:\Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics Office) when you
install the software. Use a text editor to view the contents of the
release notes.
• ftp.trimble.com – use the Trimble FTP site to send files or to
receive files such as software patches, utilities, service
bulletins, and FAQs. Alternatively, access the FTP site from the
Trimble website at www.trimble.com/support/support.htm.
• Trimble training courses – consider a training course to help
you use your GPS system to its fullest potential. For more
information, visit the Trimble website at
www.trimble.com/support/index.htm.
Technical Assistance
If you have a problem and cannot find the information you need in the
product documentation, contact your local Distributor.
Your Comments
Your feedback about the supporting documentation helps us to
improve it with each revision. To forward your comments, send an e-
mail to ReaderFeedback@trimble.com.
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xx v

About SiteWork
Document Conventions
The document conventions are as follows:
Convention Definition
Italics Identifies software menus, menu commands,
dialog boxes, and the dialog box fields.
Helvetica Narrow Represents messages printed on the screen.
Helvetica Bold Identifies a software command button, or

represents information that you must type in a
software screen or window.
“Select Italics / Italics” Identifies the sequence of menus, commands, or
dialog boxes that you must choose in order to
reach a given screen.
[Ctrl] Is an example of a hardware function key that you
must press on a personal computer (PC). If you
must press more than one of these at the same
time, this is represented by a plus sign, for
example, [Ctrl]+[C].
xxv i Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

CHAPTER
1
Installing SiteWork 1
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q Minimum requirements
Q Attaching the security lock
Q Installing Paydirt SiteWork
Q Installing a Wintab driver
Q Uninstalling SiteWork
Q Moving on in SiteWork
1.1 Introduction
Before installing your new program, use this manual to become
familiar with the features of the program. If you don’t understand how
to do something as you use the program, use the program’s online
help. Each help screen explains what the feature is and gives you step-
by-step instructions on how to use the feature.
Paydirt SiteWork is a 32-bit program designed to run on Windows 95,
98, NT, or 2000. Windows 3.1 is not a 32-bit operating system and
will not run Paydirt SiteWork versions later than 3.40. If you are
currently using Windows 3.1, we recommend that you upgrade your
system to run Windows 98 or 2000. This will enable you to run the
latest and most powerful version of Paydirt SiteWork. If you cannot
upgrade your system at this time, please contact us or your local sales
representative.
1.2 Minimum Requirements
1.2.1 Computing Power

Computing power is hard for many people to quantify. A better
computer seems to come on the market every few months. If you
already have a computer that runs the software you own, you may not
know when to even look into upgrading your computer.
While you must make the ultimate decision of when to upgrade your
computer, you should consider whether or not you have enough
computing power whenever you buy new software. Think about the
software you plan to run on your PC. Do you have enough disk space
on your hard disk drive to install and run the software? Do you have
at least the minimum amount of RAM? Does your processor meet the
minimum requirements? Do you know what advantages you would
get if you upgraded to the recommended hardware requirements or
higher? How, exactly, would upgrading your computer benefit you?
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide 3

Your hard disk drive is where your programs will be stored on the
computer. It is also the best place to store the data from your programs
because your computer can get the information it needs more quickly
from a hard disk than it can from a floppy disk. Your programs may
also need disk space as they run to store temporary information.
Today's software requires more hard disk space than older software,
because today's software can do more for you than ever before.
Graphics (pictures in the software) take up much more hard disk space
than text. If you do not have enough hard disk space for a program,
you may not be able to load the software onto the computer, and if you
can load it, the program may run very slowly or not at all.
RAM stands for Random-Access Memory. Your software needs RAM
to perform calculations and store temporary information. A program
can write to and read from RAM much more quickly than it can to the
hard disk. Today's software requires more RAM than older software,
because today's software can do more for you than ever before. If you
do not have enough RAM for a program, the program may run very
slowly or lock up the computer. We recommend that you purchase
more RAM than you think you need, because when operating systems
change, so do RAM requirements.
CPU stands for Central Processing Unit. The CPU, or processor, is
the part of the computer that does the calculations. Newer processors
can calculate faster than older processors. Many of today's programs
cannot even run on processors that were state-of-the-art technology 10
years ago. Make sure your computer is up to date with today's
technology.
Processors are further broken down by clock speed. The clock speed
is listed in megahertz (MHz). The higher the clock speed number, the
faster your processor can perform calculations. Generally, the clock
speed is listed with the processor type. For example, a computer that
has a Pentium II processor that has a 366 MHz clock speed would be
listed as a P2-366. If you do not have a processor that meets the
minimum requirements of the software, the software will not be able
to run properly. If it is able to run at all, it will run very slowly.
4 Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

If you decide your computer hardware does not meet the minimum
requirements of the software you plan to run on it, you should
definitely consider upgrading your hardware. The biggest advantage
to better computer hardware is the speed at which the software is able
to run. If your computer hardware meets or exceeds the minimum
requirements, you will not have to wait as long when the computer
needs to save information, perform calculations, draw images on the
screen, print information, etc. You will eliminate many rebooting
sessions and phone calls to technical support people. In short, you will
be able to be more productive in what you do with your computer, and
you will be less frustrated with computers in general.
Recommended Requirements
To run SiteWork and prepare for the next generation of software, we
recommend you have at least the following:
• Pentium 120 MHz CPU (200 MHz or higher preferred)
• CD-ROM drive
• 64 megabytes of RAM (128 or higher preferred)
• 40 megabytes of hard disk space available
• 2 serial ports
• 1 parallel port
• Wintab-supported digitizer board and cursor
• Wintab driver that works with your digitizer and operating
system
• Microsoft Windows 98 or 2000
• Computer monitor (17" minimum) that works under your
operating system
• Mouse or other pointing device
• Color printer compatible with your operating system

1.2.2 Contents
Your SiteWork package should contain the following:

• one program CD
• one SiteWork User's Guide
• one SiteWork Tutorial manual
• one Paydirt security key (New Orders Only)
• sample plans
• release notes
1.3 Attaching the Security Key

A security key (see figure, below) is required to access the full
functionality of Paydirt SiteWork. This is the most important
component that you have received and should be insured against loss
or theft. If the key is damaged, do not throw it away. You will be
required to return the key in order to get a replacement.
1. Unplug the printer cable from your computer (if one is

attached).
2. Plug the security key into your printer port.

3. Plug the printer cable into the security key (Figure 1.1, below).
Note – If you need to transfer the key between computers, you can
attach a straight 25 pin male-female cable between the security key.
This will provide you with easier access to the key. If you plan on
using the software on a desktop at the office and a laptop when out of
the office or on more than one computer, then you may want to do this.
Security Key
Printer Cable
Figure 1.1 Security Key attached to the computer and to the printer cable.

1.4 Installing Paydirt SiteWork

Note – If you are running the 16-bit version of the GTCO Wintab
driver, remove the driver from your startup group and close it down
before doing this installation. If there is a GTCO group in your Start |
Programs menu, then you are probably running this driver.
Note – Close any programs you have running.
To install SiteWork:
1. Close all programs and remain on the Windows Desktop.
2. Insert the SiteWork installation CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. If the setup program does not run automatically, click Start on
the Windows Taskbar. Select Run and enter d:\autorun (where
d:\ is the CD-ROM drive) in the Open field of the Run dialog
box. Click OK. The installation program will run.
4. Click on the program you would like to install. Follow the
instructions of the installation program.
1.5 Installing a Wintab Driver

A Wintab-compatible digitizer is required to work with Paydirt
SiteWork. The Wintab driver for your digitizer must be installed
before you can begin doing takeoffs. There are several brands of
digitizers that our customers use, including CalComp, GTCO,
Summagraphics and Numonics, but the majority of users are using
either a GTCO Rollup or GTCO Super L II Tablet. If you have any
questions about installing a Wintab driver, please contact technical
support or your digitizer manufacturer.
We have included the GTCO wintab drivers for different Windows
Operating Systems on the Paydirt SiteWork CD. They are located in
the following folders:
Windows 95 / 98: D:\GTCODigitizerDrivers\LcsDriverFor95-98-Me
Windows NT: D:\GTCODigitizerDrivers\LcsDriverForNT

Windows 2000: D:\GTCODigitizerDrivers\TabletWorksFor2000

GTCO CalComp, INC. handles GTCO, CalComp and Summagraphics
brand Digitizers. Please call any of the following numbers if you have
any questions regarding these products.
GTCO Brand Digitizers:
1-800-344-4723
E-mail: gtco.support@gtcoCalComp.com
Web site: www.gtcoCalComp.com
CalComp Brand Digitizers:
1-480-443-2414
E-mail: CalComp.support@gtcoCalComp.com
Website: www.gtcoCalComp.com
Summagraphics Brand Digitizers:
1-480-443-2414
E-mail: summa.support@gtcoCalComp.com
Website: www.gtcoCalComp.com
Trimble Paydirt and Terramodel Client Services:
1-800-235-4972
Web site: www.trimble.com/support
E-mail: Submit a support request using the form at
http://www.trimble.com/support_form.asp
Before installing the LCS Wintab driver, you must make sure there are
no other Wintab drivers installed on your machine. To check if a
previous version of GTCO's Wintab driver is installed, click Start, then
click Programs and check if GTCO Wintab is in the list of Programs.
If so, follow these steps to uninstall before installing the LCS Wintab.

1.5.1 Setting up the Controller

Before you test the Wintab driver in Windows, you must re-configure
your digitizer board. The way you configure your board will depend
on the board type. Follow the instructions for the GTCO digitizer
board you use.
GTCO L Series with Super Set Menu Code:
Using the 16-button cursor, reconfigure the digitizer for Wintab by
clicking S, 0, 1on the super set menu on the tablet. You should hear 4
clear beeps from the digitizer. The tablet is now configured to use
Wintab.
GTCO L Series without Super Set Menu Codes:
1. Make sure the following switches on the controller are ON:
Switch 1: 3, 4, 8
Switch 2: 5
Switch 3: 3, 4, 5, 7
2. Make sure all other switches are OFF.
3. Press the Reset button on the controller.

1.5.2 Testing the Wintab Driver
To test the Wintab driver:

1. Make sure Windows is started. When Windows starts, your
digitizer should beep 4 times. This indicates Windows is
talking to the digitizer through Wintab.
2. Move your digitizer cursor.
If the mouse cursor moves on the screen, you’ve successfully
installed Wintab.
If the mouse cursor does not move on the screen or you did not
hear the 4 beeps when Windows started, you’ve encountered
some sort of problem. Try reinstalling the driver then checking
your controller setup.

1.5.3 Mapping a Toggle Button

Paydirt SiteWork enables you to use the digitizer puck as both a
digitizer and a mouse. To use this capability, you must map a button on
the cursor to act as a Middle Double Click on the mouse. This must be
done in the setup of the Wintab driver. Shown below are pictures of
different cursor mappings and the value you should map to Middle
Double Click depending on which 16 button cursor you have.
If your cursor looks like this, you should map button value F to Middle
Double Click in the Wintab driver setup.
If your cursor looks like this, you should map button value D to
Middle Double Click in the Wintab driver setup.

If your cursor looks like this, you should map button value 7 to Middle
Double Click in the Wintab driver setup.

1.6 Uninstalling SiteWork

If you want to remove SiteWork from your hard drive, you can easily
do so with the uninstall program.
To start the uninstall program from Windows 95/98/NT:

1. Make sure SiteWork is not running.
2. Click Start on the Windows Taskbar.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select Control Panel.
5. Select Add/Remove programs. The Add/Remove Programs
dialog box appears with the Install/Uninstall tab in front (see the
figure below).

6. Highlight Paydirt SiteWork in the list of programs.

7. Click Add/Remove. The Remove Programs from Your
Computer dialog box will appear and Paydirt SiteWork will be
removed from your hard drive when you indicate your
confirmation.
8. Click OK. You are returned to the Add/Remove dialog box.
9. Click Cancel.
1.7 Moving on in SiteWork

This chapter has given you step-by-step instructions on how to install
Wintab and SiteWork. See Chapter 2, Getting Started for step-by-step
instruction on how to create a new project. See Chapters 3-6 for
instructions on how to input your data and use the data screen.


CHAPTER
2
Getting Started 2
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q Starting SiteWork
Q Starting a new project
Q Working with the project
Q Backing up your work
Q English versus metric units
Getting Started 2
2.1 Introduction
Once you have installed SiteWork, you can get started on a new
project immediately. This chapter gives you an overview of what
SiteWork is, what it can do, and how it does it. It explains how to start
SiteWork, start a new project, close SiteWork, and open an existing
project. Read this chapter if you are a new SiteWork user.
2.2 Starting SiteWork

Be sure to start your computer and start Windows before you follow
these instructions.
There are two ways to start SiteWork. You can start it from the Start
menu or you can start it from a shortcut icon. Choose the method that
works best for you. (See your Windows documentation to learn how
to create a shortcut icon.)
To start SiteWork from the Start menu:

1. Click Start on the Windows Taskbar.
2. Select Programs / Paydirt / SiteWork.
To start SiteWork from a shortcut icon:

Double-click the SiteWork icon on the Windows desktop.
2.3 Starting a New Project

SiteWork is set up to be similar to a set of plans for a job. A SiteWork
project is one site excavation job. A SiteWork drawing is a plan sheet
that you use to take off excavation quantities. A project contains at
least one drawing. If a plan set has several sheets, the SiteWork
project may contain a drawing for each sheet. A SiteWork surface is a
view of the drawing. A drawing contains at least two surfaces. The

2 Getting Started
existing and the proposed surfaces are already created for you when
you first set up a new project. A drawing can have as many surfaces as
necessary.
To create a new project:

1. Select Project / New. The New dialog box appears (below).
2. Enter the name of the new project in the Project ID field. The
Project ID is the only information in the New dialog box that is
required to create a new project.
3. If you would like to keep good electronic records about your
project, enter the information in any of the other fields.
4. Click OK when you are finished entering the new project
information. The Add Drawing dialog box appears (as shown in
the next figure).
Note – To quickly move from one field to the next in a dialog
box, press [Tab]. Press [Shift]+[Tab] to move to the previous field.

Getting Started 2
5. Enter the name of the new drawing in the Drawing Name field.
6. Grid spacing defaults to 5 ft/m. To change the grid spacing,
enter the new spacing in the Grid Spacing field.
How you set your grid spacing depends on how important time
and accuracy are to you. If you set your grid spacing very small,
your volumes and visual detail will be extremely accurate, but
the calculations will take longer. If you set your grid spacing
very large, the calculations will happen very quickly, but your
volumes and visual detail will not be as accurate as they could
be. Experiment with grid spacing to compare the differences.

2 Getting Started
7. Drawing Elevations minimum and maximum values default to -

1000 ft/m to 15000 ft/m. To change the Drawing Elevations
min/max values:
a. Enter the new minimum value in the Minimum field.
b. Enter the new maximum value in the Maximum field.
8. Entity Thickness minimum and maximum values default to -3
ft/m and 3 ft/m. To change the Entity Thickness min/max values:
a. Enter the new minimum value in the Minimum field.
b. Enter the new maximum value in the Maximum field.
9. Click OK when you are finished setting your new drawing
options. The Drawing Scale dialog box appears (see below).
10. You can set the drawing scale using the scale value of your
plans or using a known distance on your plans.
To use Scale Value to set the drawing scale:

Select the Scale value option and enter the scale value from your plans
in the adjacent field.
To use Known Distance to set the drawing scale:

a. Choose an item (at least 3 in (7.7 cm) long) on the plans
whose length you know.
b. Select the Known distance option.
c. Carefully digitize the first point of the known distance.

Getting Started 2
d. Carefully digitize the second point of the known distance.

e. Enter the distance between the two points. The new scale
value will be displayed in the Scale value field.
11. Click OK.
The Surface Data dialog box replaces the Project dialog box.
You are now ready to digitize or import your data. See
Chapter 3, Using the Data Window to learn how to use the
Surface Data dialog box. See Chapter 4, Digitizing Data to
learn how to digitize data. See Chapter 5, Importing Data to
learn how to import data. See Chapter 6, Learning About Data
Types for an in-depth look at SiteWork's data types.
2.4 Working with the Project

SiteWork automatically saves everything you do. When you start
SiteWork, it automatically opens the last project you were working on,
so you can get right back to what you were doing before you exited the
program.
2.4.1 Exiting SiteWork

Selecting Exit from any menu ends your session with the program.
Use Exit when you are completely finished using the program. If you
want to close a certain window, select Close.
To exit SiteWork:
1. Select Project / Exit.
2. If a window is open, then a question box appears asking you if
you are sure you want to exit SiteWork. Click Yes.
Note – You can also exit the program using the close button on the
main title bar. The surface data window also has a close button. This
button will close the surface data window, not the program.

2 Getting Started
2.4.2 Opening an Existing Project

SiteWork automatically opens the last project you were working on, so
you don’t need to manually open your last project. However, if you
want to work on another pre-existing project, you can use the recent
project list or select Project / Open.
Note – SiteWork for Windows cannot open SiteWork for DOS projects.
If you have a SiteWork for DOS project you want to use in SiteWork,
see Chapter 17, Converting from DOS to Windows.
To open one of your last four projects:

1. Select Project.
2. Highlight the name of the file you want to open in the file list.
To open any project:

1. Select Project / Open. The Open dialog box appears (see
below).
2. If necessary, open the Drives and Directories lists to locate the

name of the file you want to open.

Getting Started 2
3. In the File Name list, select the name of the project you want to
open. The project you chose becomes the current project.

2 Getting Started
2.5 Backing Up Your Work

Consider how many hours you use SiteWork each week. Think about
what could happen to your work and you if something happened to
your SiteWork data (e.g., fire, virus, etc.). You can use SiteWork’s
Archive feature as very cheap insurance against losing your data. You
can archive your current project(s) onto a floppy disk before you go
home in the evening and take it home with you. If you ever need to use
your backup, simply use SiteWork’s Restore feature to recover the
data. (See Chapter 13, Working with Paydirt SiteWork Projects for
instructions on restoring your projects.)
To back up a project:
1. Select Project / Archive. The Archive dialog box appears (see
below).
2. If necessary, open the Drives and Directories lists to locate the

name of the project you want to archive.
3. Select the project you want to archive in the Project Name list.
The name appears in the Project Name field.

Getting Started 2
4. Enter the path for the archived file in the Archive destination
field.
OR
Click Browse and change to the correct directory.
Note – Files can be archived to a network drive.
5. Click OK. Each archived project will have the .ZIP extension.
2.6 English versus Metric Units

SiteWork can work in either English or metric units. The English
system of measurement is based on individual standard measurements
where 1 foot equals 12 inches. The metric system of measurement is
based on the decimal system where one meter is equal to 100
centimeters, one centimeter is equal to .01 meters, one meter is equal
to .001 kilometers, and one kilometer is equal to 1000 meters.
The most important thing to remember about units is that 1 cubic yard
of dirt does NOT equal 1 cubic meter of dirt, and 1 cubic meter of dirt
does NOT equal 1 cubic yard of dirt. In English units 1 cubic yard of
dirt is a little more than ¾ of a cubic meter. If you estimate a job
thinking that 1 cubic yard is roughly the same as 1 cubic meter, you
would be underestimating by about 25%.
1 cubic meter of dirt is equal to 1.308 cubic yards of dirt. If you
estimate a job thinking that 1 cubic meter of dirt is roughly the same as
1 cubic yard of dirt, you would be overestimating by about 30%.
Luckily, SiteWork can easily and accurately make the conversions for
you. You can switch the units any time from before the beginning of
the project to in the middle of doing your takeoffs to the very end of
the project when you are running your reports. It is all up to how you
like to work.

2 Getting Started
To switch between Feet and Meters:

1. Select Tools / Options / Project Settings. The Project Settings
dialog box will open (see below).
2. Select the measurements system you want to use.

3. Click OK. SiteWork converts all of your measurements to the
new units.
Note – If you are used to bidding jobs in a particular measurement
system, perform your takeoff in that system and then convert the units
in More Preferences to get the final volume calculations. It is
important not to use meters and yards interchangeably; bidding
10,000 cubic meters as 10,000 cubic yards will cause you to
underestimate your cost.

This chapter has taken you from starting SiteWork to setting up a
project to opening an existing project. See Chapter 3, Using the Data
Window to learn how to use the Surface Data screen. See Chapter 4,
Digitizing Data to learn how to digitize data. See Chapter 5,
Importing Data to learn how to import data. See Chapter 6, Learning
About Data Types for an in-depth look at SiteWork's data types.

CHAPTER
3
Using the Data Window 3
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q Surface Data window
Q Working in the Surface Data window
Q Working with surfaces
Q Zooming
Q Refresh
Q Relocate drawing
Q Copying data to the clipboard
Q Closing the Surface Data window
3.1 Introduction
The data window lets you set up the data SiteWork needs for
calculating volumes. Before you can input data, you should have a
basic understanding of how to use the data window. See Chapter 4,
Digitizing Data and Chapter 5, Importing Data for information about
inputting your data. See Chapter 6, Learning About Data Types for an
in-depth look at the data types.
3.2 Surface Data Window

When you open a project or set up a new project and drawing,
SiteWork automatically places you in the Surface Data window.
Alternatively, selecting Plan Data from the View menu on the Project
menu bar takes you to the Surface Data window where you can input,
delete, and change your data for the current surface. The Surface Data
window lets you see information for only one surface at a time. When
SiteWork does the calculations for its reports, it compares two surfaces
and calculates the differences in the elevations. You decide what
surfaces you want to use.

3.2.1 Summary
To open the Surface Data window:

1. Select View / Plan Data. The Surface Data window opens
(Figure 3.1).
Title Bar Current Drawing Name Current Surface Name
Current Project Name Menu Bar
Figure 3.1 SiteWork’s Surface Data window.

3.3 Working in the Surface Data Window
3.3.1 Surface Data Edit Modes

The Surface Data window is set up to work in data edit modes. There
are four edit modes: Digitize, Change, Delete, and Copy. You must be
in one of these modes to manipulate the data in the surface. You
remain in the mode you select until you select a different mode.
To put SiteWork into one of the four modes using the

toolbar:
Click to put SiteWork into Digitize mode.
Click to put SiteWork into Change mode.
Click to put SiteWork into Delete mode.
Click to put SiteWork into Copy mode.
Once you are in one of the modes, you must tell SiteWork what data
type you want to manipulate. (To learn more information about each
data type, see Chapter 6, Learning About Data Types.) You can then
work with that data type in the selected mode. When you are finished
with the data type, you can switch to a different data type.
3.3.2 Selecting a Data Type
To select a data type using the toolbar:

Click to select Areas of Interest.
Click to select Contour Lines.
Click to select Elevation Points.
Click to select Subgrade Adjustments.
Click to select Sloping Lines.
Click to select Pads.

Note – The following four data types are available only in SiteWork Advanced:
Click to select Boreholes.
Click to select Control Points.
Click to select Cut Stakes.
Click to select Sloping Areas.
To select an edit mode and a data type using the menu bar:
1. Select Edit / Draw (Digitize), Change, Copy, or Delete.
2. From the cascading menu select a data type: Areas of Interest,
Boreholes, Contour Lines, Control Points, Cut Stake Points,
Elevation Points, Subgrade Adjustments, Sloping Areas,
Sloping Lines, or Pads.
Note – When you select any of the four modes for the first time in a
session, a dialog box will appear, asking you to digitize your reference
points, except when you are using the Mouse Edit feature. See
Chapter 4, Digitizing Data for detailed information on reference
points.
3.3.3 Working in the Mode

As soon as you select a data type, a dialog box opens so you can set up
to do what you need to do. See Chapter 6, Learning About Data Types
for instructions on handling the digitize and copy dialog boxes. See
Chapter 7, Editing Data: Changing What You’ve Done for instructions
on handling the change and delete dialog boxes.

3.3.4 Mouse Edit

You can also click or select Edit / Mouse Edit to turn on Mouse
Edit. When Mouse Edit is on, the mouse behaves like a digitizer
cursor, allowing you to add, edit, or delete entities from your
drawings. Mouse Edit replaces the Screen Edit mode from previous
versions of SiteWork. When you have Mouse Edit turned on, you will
still need to select a mode (digitize, change, delete, or copy).
3.4 Working with Surfaces

Once you have a basic understanding of how the Surface Data window
works, you can work in any surface and even create new surfaces.
A SiteWork surface works like a file folder containing all the
information you need about a surface. You store information about the
surface only in the surface's file. When you are ready to run reports on
the project, you can decide which surface's file you want to use and
which ones you don't.
3.4.1 Changing Surfaces

Open lets you select a surface to work with.
To open a surface:
1. Click .
OR
Select Edit / Surface / Open. The Open dialog box opens (see
figure, next page).

2. Select the name of the surface you want to open in the Surface
Name list.
3. Click OK. The selected surface becomes the current surface. If
you are in the Project window, the data window for that surface
automatically opens.
3.4.2 Adding a Surface

Add Surface creates a new surface on the current drawing. When you
add a surface, any existing AOIs are visible on the new surface.

To add a surface:
1. Select Edit / Surface / Add. The Add Surface dialog box opens
(see figure, below).
2. Enter the name of the new surface in the Surface Name field.
3. If you want this surface to tie to the daylight surface at any
daylight AOI boundaries, select the Use Daylight AOI check
box.
4. Click OK. You can now work with this surface as you have been
able to do with any other surface.
Note – The Digitize Borehole Dialog automatically creates surfaces
for substrata.
3.5 Zooming
Sometimes it is easier to work with enlarged or reduced data on your
screen. SiteWork's zoom features let you do just that. You can zoom
any time, even when you are in the middle of digitizing.
3.5.1 Mouse Zoom

You can zoom in on a precise area of the data window.

To zoom in on a precise area:

1. Press and hold the left mouse button at one corner of the area
you want to view.
2. Drag the mouse until SiteWork draws a dashed rectangle over
the area you want to enlarge.
3. Release the mouse button.
3.5.2 Zoom In
Zoom In enlarges the display by two times (2x) its original size.
To zoom in:
Click .
OR
Select View / Zoom In.
3.5.3 Zoom Out

Zoom Out reduces the display by two times (2x) its present size.
To zoom out:
Click .
OR
Select View / Zoom Out.

3.5.4 Zoom All

Zoom All resets the zoom factor so you can see all of the data.
To reset the zoom factor:

Click .
OR
Select View / Zoom All.
3.6 Refresh
Refresh redraws the project, erasing any deleted data and showing any
new data you set to be displayed in the Show Options dialog box. You
can refresh any time, even if you are in the middle of digitizing.
To redraw the screen:

Press [F5].
OR
Click .
OR
Select View / Refresh.
3.7 Relocate Drawing

Relocate Drawing tells SiteWork where the drawing or plans are
located on the digitizer board. Use Relocate Drawing if you move the
drawing, if you are not sure if the drawing has moved, or if your
drawing for the surface has a different scale than the original drawing.

C Warning – Never change the drawing scale in the Drawing Information

dialog box unless it was originally input incorrectly. If you have drawings of
the same area in a different scale, the reference points you digitize will tell
SiteWork how to adjust the scale.
To relocate the drawing:

1. Click .
OR
Select Edit / Drawing / Locate Drawing. The Drawing
Reference dialog box appears.
2. Carefully digitize the reference points. (See Chapter 4,
Digitizing Data for more details about reference points.)
3.8 Copying Data to the Clipboard

Copy to Clipboard sends a "snapshot" of the window to the Clipboard
in your Windows desktop. See your Microsoft Windows User's Guide
for more information.
To copy the data in the surface data screen to the

clipboard:
1. Select Edit / Copy to Clipboard
OR
Press [Ctrl]+[C].
2. Open the other application and paste the image according to the
application's instructions.

3.9 Closing the Surface Data Window

Close closes the Surface Data window and takes you to the Project
window.
To exit the Surface Data window:

Select Window / Close Current.


CHAPTER
4
Digitizing Data 4
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q Using your digitizer cursor
Q Digitizing
Q Digitizing enclosed entities
Q Digitizing line data
Q Digitizing point data
Q Creating substrata volumes
Q Copying enclosed entities
Q Copying line data
Q Multiple surface input
Q Control points
Q Editing with a mouse
Q Doing a multiple-page takeoff
Digitizing Data 4
4.1 Introduction
Digitizing is the act of inputting data into the computer by tracing the
data from a plan sheet. It is a simple thing to do, but practice will
enable you to input data faster and more accurately. Refer to
Chapter 6, Learning About Data Types to gain a better understanding
of what the data types are and what they can do for you. Refer to
Chapter 3, Using the Data Window to understand the Surface Data
window before you begin digitizing for a job.
If you have never used SiteWork before, follow the tutorial that comes
with SiteWork to become intimately familiar with basic digitizing.
The tutorial takes you from starting SiteWork through digitizing a
sample plan. Then it explains some special digitizing circumstances.
The more you digitize, the better you will know what information to
include and what information not to include.
4.1.1 Advantages to Digitizing

Digitizing data offers two advantages over importing data: you have
more freedom over what you put in your surface and you don't have to
worry about having someone sort out the data for you if you are not
familiar with CAD systems. When you digitize data, you decide what
should influence the surface model and what should just stay on the
plan sheet for reference.
You do not need to do any special preparations when you plan to
digitize your data. All you need is your digitizer board, digitizer
cursor, your plan, your computer, and SiteWork.
4.1.2 Surfaces and Digitizing

The concept of SiteWork’s surfaces are the same whether you import
or digitize. (See Chapter 3, Using the Data Window for an explanation
of working with SiteWork’s surfaces.) When you are finished
digitizing data for one surface, make sure you switch surfaces before
you digitize the data for the next surface.

4 Digitizing Data
4.1.3 Coordinates and Digitizing

When you digitize, SiteWork is automatically in whatever coordinate
mode you have set up in your preferences (field or relative mode).
4.1.4 Your Experience

Your experience as an estimator plays a very important role when you
use an estimating tool. You need to continue to carefully scrutinize the
plan and its data in SiteWork. You may need to add data that will
improve the surface model. Count on yourself as you use SiteWork to
develop a powerful estimating team.
4.2 Using Your Digitizer Cursor

Your digitizer cursor is like a drafting pencil for your computer.
Before you start using it with SiteWork, make sure the buttons are set
up in a way that is comfortable and convenient for you. See Chapter 1,
Installing SiteWork to learn how to set up the Wintab driver for your
digitizer. This will ensure that your digitizer works properly in mouse
mode. See Chapter 14, Customizing Paydirt SiteWork to learn how to
map the buttons for when the cursor is in input mode.
4.2.1 Toggling in SiteWork

When you installed SiteWork, you also installed Wintab. Wintab lets
you use the digitizer cursor as a mouse in addition to using it as a
digitizer cursor. The toggle feature lets you switch between the two
modes. For example, let's say Wintab is in digitize mode but you need
to get help on how to digitize something. Simply press the toggle
button, and click on Help on the menu bar. When you are finished
with the help, move the mouse cursor into the data window, press the
toggle button, and continue digitizing. In short, this function allows
you to use either the mouse or the digitizer cursor exclusively: you
don't need t o switch from one to the other in the middle of your job.
You can use this feature any time you are digitizing in SiteWork.

Digitizing Data 4
4.3 Digitizing
You can digitize in one of two ways: stream mode or point mode.
You are using stream mode when you press and hold the digitize
button on your cursor and follow the lines you are digitizing. This
method adds points as you trace along the line. When you are finished
making the line, release the digitizing button. If you have released the
digitizing button in the middle of a line, you can continue digitizing by
pressing the button again as you start tracing.
You are using point mode when you digitize one point at a time. This
method creates a new data point each time you press and release the
digitize button.
Practice using these two methods in different situations to determine
when you should use each. You can combine the two methods while
digitizing the same line. Use point mode to digitize straight parts of
lines and stream mode for curved parts of lines. In general, we
recommend using point mode to digitize because it reduces the
number of points and speeds up SiteWork's calculations.
4.3.1 Setting up to Digitize

SiteWork is set up so you can digitize as many things as you need to
with as few steps as possible. When you are in the surface data
window and you set up to digitize, you are in digitize mode until you
set up to change, set up to delete, set up to copy, or close out of the
surface data window.
To set up to digitize:
Click .
OR
Select Edit / Draw (Digitize) and select the data type you want to
digitize.

4 Digitizing Data
4.3.2 Reference Points

When you select a data type to digitize, a dialog box appears asking
you to digitize in your reference points.
Without exception, reference points are the most important items you
can input for any drawing. SiteWork bases everything from drawing
location to drawing scale on the reference points you digitize.
Relative reference points establish a coordinate system for a drawing
relative to the position of the plan on the digitizer board. You do not
need to do anything extra to use relative reference points, but be sure
to follow the guidelines (discussed in the next section) for inputting
reference points.
Field reference points establish a coordinate system for a drawing
based on two known coordinate points that you provide. Field
reference points let you make SiteWork's coordinates exactly match
the coordinates in the field or on the engineer's drawing.
To use relative reference points, set your coordinate system to Relative
(the default setting) in the More Preferences dialog box before you
create the project. To use field reference points, set your coordinate
system to Field in the More Preferences dialog box before you create
the project. See Chapter 14, Customizing Paydirt SiteWork for
instructions on selecting the type of coordinate system. See Control
Points, page 92 to learn how to switch from relative to field mode.
For accurate volumes, you should follow some guidelines

as you establish reference points:
• Choose two points easily found in the field and on any set of
plans you may get for the current project (i.e., property corners,
monuments, or staked bench marks).
• The points can be inside or outside the limits of the drawing.
However, do not pick points that may not appear on a drawing
created in a different scale.
• Use points that are farther apart rather than closer together to
increase accuracy.

Digitizing Data 4
• Circle or highlight relative reference points on the plan so you

will never forget where they are, and mark them as point 1 and
point 2.
• Be as precise as possible when digitizing the reference points.
To use relative reference points:

1. The Relative Reference Points dialog box opens when you
relocate (move) the drawing or when you first set up to digitize,
edit, or delete data after you create a new drawing or open an
existing drawing.
2. Digitize reference point 1 using your designated digitize button.
3. Digitize reference point 2 using your designated digitize button.
To use field coordinates:

1. If you have already located the reference points, a prompt
appears asking you if your drawing has moved or changed. If
you are working with the same sheet and it has not been moved,
click No. You can continue working without redigitizing your
reference points. Otherwise, click Yes.
2. The Field Reference Points dialog box opens when you relocate
(move) the drawing or when you first set up to digitize, edit, or
delete data after you create a new drawing or open an existing
drawing (see figure, next page).
3. If the Current button is enabled, you have digitized reference
points for this drawing already. If the Current button is disabled
and you have not moved your drawing, click Current, and go to
step 6.
4. Enter the first set of coordinates in the North and East fields for
reference point #1.
5. Repeat step 4 for the other coordinates.

4 Digitizing Data
6. Click OK.
7. You will be prompted to verify that your reference points are
correct. Click Yes.
8. Digitize your reference points using your designated digitize
button.

Digitizing Data 4
4.4 Digitizing Enclosed Entities

Enclosed entities include subgrade adjustments, pads, sloping areas,
and areas of interest. You must always digitize enclosed entities in a
counterclockwise direction. SiteWork automatically closes the
enclosed entity when you press [Enter].
4.4.1 Areas of Interest

An area of interest (AOI) acts as a fence or boundary for volume
calculations. Before SiteWork begins its calculations, you should
create at least one AOI: the master AOI. Typically, the limits of
grading are used as the master AOI. The master AOI is used as the
default area for volume calculations. If you do not use an AOI, your
volumes may not be what you expect.
You can create as many AOIs as needed for calculating information for
specific areas of your plans. Use multiple AOIs to calculate the
volumes for different phases of a project.
You can set the AOI up as a Daylight AOI. A Daylight AOI is an
enclosed boundary where the proposed surface ties to the existing
surface. At the Daylight AOI boundary, the proposed and existing
surface elevations are equal. You can also set an AOI up as an
Exclusion AOI. This means that SiteWork will exclude any data
within the AOI during volume calculations.
Note – You can also copy a subgrade adjustment, pad, or sloping area
to create an AOI. See the section on copying enclosed entities later in
this chapter.
To digitize AOIs:
1. If SiteWork is not in digitize mode, click .
2. Click .
OR

4 Digitizing Data
Select Edit / Draw (Digitize) / Areas of Interest. The Areas of

Interest Input dialog box appears (below).
3. Enter the name of the AOI in the Name field. The name will
default to AOI X where X is the number of AOIs created. If you
enter a new name, future AOIs will default to that name. For
example, if you enter Region, the name of the next AOI will
default to Region 2.
4. Enter the name of the group in the Group field.
OR
Select the name of the group in the Group list.
5. If you want this AOI to be the master AOI, select the Master
check box.
6. If you want this AOI to be a Daylight AOI, select the Daylight
to check box. In the Daylight to list, select the surface to which
you want to daylight.
7. If you want the area defined by this AOI excluded from volume
calculations, select the Exclusion AOI check box.
8. Click Start.
9. Digitize the AOI. Be sure to digitize it in a counterclockwise
direction.
10. Press [Enter] on the keyboard or on your cursor.

Digitizing Data 4
11. To digitize another AOI, repeat steps 2-9.

OR
Click Cancel to close the AOI Input dialog box.
4.4.2 Subgrade Adjustment

SiteWork subgrade adjustments are used to adjust a surface from
finished grade to subgrade. A subgrade adjustment is an enclosed area
with an associated thickness that follows the lay of the surface.
Subgrade adjustments subtract the thickness of the subgrade
adjustment from the generated surface elevation when the thickness is
entered as a positive number. This lowers the elevation of the surface.
If the thickness is entered as a negative number, the surface’s
elevations will be raised.
To set up to digitize subgrade adjustments:

2. Click . The Draw Subgrade Adjustment dialog box
appears (below).
OR
Select Edit / Draw (Digitize) / Subgrade Adjustment (Layers).
The Draw Subgrade Adjustment dialog box appears.

4 Digitizing Data
3. Enter the name of the subgrade adjustment in the Name field.

The name defaults to Subgrade Adjustment X, where X is the
number of subgrade adjustments created. If you enter a new
name, future subgrade adjustments will default to that name.
For example, if you enter Parking Lot, the name of the next
subgrade adjustment will default to Parking Lot 2.
4. Enter the name of the group in the Group field (for example,
Asphalt). The group for additional subgrade adjustments will
default to the group you enter until you enter or select a new
group.
OR
Select the name of the group in the Group list.
Note – We recommend using names that indicate locations and
groups that represent materials.
5. Enter the thickness of the subgrade adjustment in the Thickness
field.
6. If you plan to use a conversion factor, select the Conversion
Factor check box.
7. Click Start.
8. If you chose to apply a conversion factor in step 5 and have not
defined the group yet, the Group Conversion Factor Edit dialog
box appears (see the figure on the next page). Create the new
group, then click OK.

Digitizing Data 4
9. In the Factor field, enter the multiplier factor to convert the

cubic yards of material in the selected group to the desired
units. For example, enter 2 to convert cubic yards of asphalt to
tons of asphalt.
10. Digitize the subgrade adjustment. Be sure to digitize it in a

counterclockwise direction.
11. Press [Enter] on the keyboard or on your cursor to close the
subgrade adjustment.
12. To digitize another subgrade adjustment, repeat steps 2-10.
OR
Click Cancel to close the Subgrade Adjustment Input dialog
box.

4 Digitizing Data
4.4.3 Pads
A pad is an enclosed area that is perfectly flat with only one associated
elevation. You may enter a thickness for a pad, which will determine
subgrade. This feature enables you to report material volumes for
your pads. SiteWork also allows you to determine whether the pad’s
outer boundary will act like a contour line, affecting the elevations of
the surrounding areas.
To set up to digitize pads:

2. Click .
OR
Select Edit / Draw (Digitize) / Pads. The Pad Input dialog box
appears (below).
Note – If some of the information you are digitizing is also on

other surfaces, you can use the Multiple Surface Input feature,
and digitize the information only once. Turn the Multiple
Surface Input feature on or off as necessary. For more
information, see Multiple Surface Input, page 90.

Digitizing Data 4
3. Enter the name of the pad in the Name field. The name defaults
to Pad X, where X is the number of pads created. If you enter a
new name, future pads will default to that name. For example,
if you enter Building, the name of the next pad will default to
Building 2.
OR
Select the name of the group from the Group list.
5. Enter the thickness of the pad in the Thickness field.
Factor check box.
7. If you want the outer border of the pad to act as a contour line,
select the Boundary Contour at Elevation check box. If you
select this check box, the elevation of the pad’s outer edge will
affect the surrounding surface in the same way as a contour line.
8. If you do not want subgrade adjustments you digitize to adjust
the elevation under the pad, select the Protect Entity from
Subgrade Adjustment check box. If you do not select this check
box, subgrade adjustments you create will affect the elevation of
the subgrades under the pad. This check box is disabled if the
Individually Lock check box is cleared in More Preferences.
9. Click Start.
10. If you selected Conversion Factor and you have not defined the
conversion factor for the group, the Group Conversion Factor
Edit dialog box appears. Create the new group, then click OK.
11. Digitize the pad. Be sure to digitize it in a counterclockwise
direction.
13. Digitize another pad by repeating steps 2-11
OR
Click Cancel to close the Pad Input dialog box.

4 Digitizing Data
4.4.4 Sloping Area

A sloping area is an area that has a uniform slope. Sloping areas are
enclosed entities. There are two methods of creating sloping areas:
Three Elevation Points and Slope Percent.
To digitize sloping areas:

2. Click . The Digitize Sloping Areas dialog box appears (see
the figure on the next page).
OR
Select Edit / Draw (Digitize) / Sloping Areas. The Digitize
Sloping Areas dialog box appears (see the figure on the next
page).
3. Enter the name of the sloping area in the Name field. The name
defaults to Slope Area X, where X is the number of sloping
areas created. If you enter a new name, future sloping areas will
default to that name. For example, if you enter Grade, the name
of the next sloping area will default to Grade 2.

Digitizing Data 4

OR
5. Enter the thickness of the sloping area in the Thickness field.
Factor check box.
7. Select either the Three Elevation Points or the Slope Percent
method to digitize the sloping area.
8. If you don’t want subgrade adjustments you create to adjust
subgrade elevations below the sloping area, select the Protect
Entity from Subgrade Adjustment check box. This box is
disabled unless the Individually Lock check box is selected in
More Preferences.

4 Digitizing Data
9. If you want the boundary of the sloping area to act as a sloping

line and affect the surrounding area, select the Boundary
Sloping Line at Finished Grade check box.
Digitizing Method 1: Three Elevation Points:

This method requires that you digitize three points with elevations to
define the slope of the sloping area. The three points may not be on a
straight line and it is common for two of the points to have the same
elevation.
1. Select the Three Elevation Points option.
2. Click OK. The Three Point Method dialog box appears (see
below).
3. Enter the elevation of the first point you plan to digitize in the
Point 1 Elevation field.
4. Repeat step 3 for the other two points, entering their elevations
in the Point 2 Elevation and Point 3 Elevation fields,
respectively.
5. Click OK.

Digitizing Data 4
6. Digitize each of the three elevation points. They can be inside,

outside, or on the boundary of the sloping area.
7. If you selected Conversion Factor and you have not yet defined
the conversion factor for the group, the Group Conversion
Factor Edit dialog box appears. Create the new group, then
click OK.
8. Digitize the sloping area. Be sure to digitize it in a
10. Digitize another sloping area.
OR
Click Cancel to close the Sloping Area Input dialog box.
Digitizing Method 2: Slope Percent:

This method requires that you digitize a point with an elevation and
digitize two points indicating the direction of fall. The three digitized
points cannot be on a straight line.
1. Select the Slope Percent option.
2. Click OK. The Slope Percent Method dialog box appears
(below).
3. Enter the elevation of a point in the sloping area in the Elevation

field.
4. Enter the slope percent in the Slope Percent field.

4 Digitizing Data
5. Click OK.
6. Digitize the point.
7. Digitize a high point of the slope-direction arrow. The tip of the
slope direction arrow can extend beyond the boundary of the
area.
8. Digitize a low point of the slope direction arrow. The tip of the
slope direction arrow can extend beyond the boundary of the
area.
9. If you selected Conversion Factor and you have not defined the
conversion factor for the group, the Group Conversion Factor
Edit dialog box appears. Create the new group, then click OK.
10. Digitize the sloping area. Be sure to digitize it in a
12. Digitize another sloping area.
OR
Click Cancel to close the Sloping Area Input dialog box.

Digitizing Data 4
4.5 Digitizing Line Data

Line data is a line of connected points designed to influence the
elevation of the surface on either side of itself while not letting data
from one side influence the elevation of the surface on the other side.
4.5.1 Contour Lines

A contour line is a line of data with a constant elevation, representing
the natural contour of the site. Contour lines are connected data.
Contour lines can be used interchangeably with sloping lines that are
restricted to one elevation.
When digitizing contour lines that continue beyond the AOI (or
intersect the AOI), digitize the contour lines through the AOI. Also, do
not stop the proposed contour lines where they tie to existing contour
lines unless you have daylighted the common part of the existing
contour lines to the proposed surface.
If you make a mistake as you digitize a contour line, you can press
backspace on your keyboard or cursor to delete the mistake right away,
or your can wait until you are finished digitizing and change or delete
the contour line(s).
There are two methods for digitizing contour lines in SiteWork 5. You
can use the earlier versions' digitizing method, or you can use the new
method, which enables the different Trimble products to be set up and
used in a similar fashion.The +/- Contour Interval method (old
method) is explained beginning on page 65.
To digitize contour lines with the new method:

2. Click . The Digitize Contours dialog box appears (see
below).
OR

4 Digitizing Data
Select Edit / Draw (Digitize) / Contour Lines. The Digitize

Contours dialog box appears (below).
3. Enter the elevation of the first contour in the Elevation field.

4. Look at your plans and determine if your contour lines were
drawn using a consistent interval. Enter the interval between
contours in the Interval field.
5. To use the new method of digitizing, make sure the Use enter
key to end contour and bump interval box is cleared.
6. To have Paydirt automatically close contours whose beginning
and ending points are within a specified range, check the Auto
detect close contour check box.
information on storing multiple surfaces, see Multiple Surface
Input, page 90.
7. Click Start. You are now ready to start digitizing.
8. Place your cursor at one end of the contour line, and begin
digitizing the line.
9. At the end of the contour line, press [Enter] on your cursor or
keyboard. The contour is completed, and the elevation for the
next contour is automatically incremented.

Digitizing Data 4
Note – A “+” sign next to the elevation on the Status Bar

indicates that each increment is increasing the elevation, while
a “-” sign on the Status Bar denotes that each increment is
decreasing the elevation.
You can force a contour to close on itself by pressing [Ctrl] +
[Enter] to end the contour and connect the last point to the first
point.
10. Digitize the next contour.
Note – If you want to toggle the interval between positive and
negative, press the [-] key on your cursor. To skip an interval,
click on the [.] key to add the interval to the elevation.
11. If you pressed [Enter], you can digitize another contour (repeat
steps 2-7) or press [Enter] again to return to the Digitize Contours
dialog box.
12. Set up to digitize another contour by repeating steps 4 - 8.
OR
Click Cancel to close the Digitize Contours dialog box.
To digitize contour lines using the SiteWork 3.X method:

1. If SiteWork is not in digitize mode, click .Click . The
Digitize Contours dialog box appears (see the figure on
page 64)
OR
Select Edit / Draw (Digitize). Click Contour Lines. The Digitize
Contours dialog box appears (see the figure on page 64).
Note – If some of the information you are digitizing is on other
surfaces, you can use the Multiple Surface Input feature, and
digitize the information only once. Turn the Multiple Surface
Input feature on or off as necessary.
2. Enter the elevation of the contour in the Elevation field.

4 Digitizing Data
3. Look at your plans and determine if your contour lines were

drawn using a consistent interval. Enter the interval in the
Interval field.
5. Place your cursor at one end of the contour line, and begin
digitizing the line. The contour can and should begin outside
the area of interest to create the best surface model possible,
even if the contour does not even reach the AOI boundary.
6. At the end of the contour line, press [+], [-], [.], or [Enter] on your
cursor or keyboard.
7. If you pressed [+], [-], or [.], you are ready to digitize the next
contour. Repeat steps 5 & 6.
8. If you pressed [Enter], you can:
Set up to digitize another contour by repeating steps 2 - 6.
OR
Click Cancel to close the Digitize Contours dialog box.

Digitizing Data 4
4.5.2 Sloping Lines

A sloping line is a line of data containing at least two points where the
elevation can vary and the slope between points is constant. Sloping
lines are connected data. Sloping lines can be used interchangeably
with contours as long as the sloping line is restricted to one elevation.
Use sloping lines for parking lots, drainage swales, curb lines, and cul-
de-sacs. There are two methods of creating sloping lines: Calculate
Between Known Points and Known Elevations.
To set up to digitize sloping lines:

1. If SiteWork is not in digitize mode, click . Click . The
Digitize Sloping Lines Input dialog box appears.
OR
Select Edit / Draw (Digitize) / Sloping Lines.
The Digitize Sloping Lines dialog box appears (below).

2. Use either the Calculate Between Known Points or Known
Elevations method to digitize the sloping line.

4 Digitizing Data
Digitizing Method 1:Calculate Between Known Points:

Note – You can follow each of these instructions using only the
digitizer cursor.
1. Select the Calculate Between Known Points option.
2. Enter the starting elevation of the sloping line in the Initial
Elevation field.
4. Place your cursor at the starting point of the sloping line, and
digitize the point.
5. Digitize until you find the next point with a known elevation.
6. Press [Enter]. The Sloping Line Elevation dialog box appears
(below).
7. Enter the known elevation in the Elevation field.

8. Press [Enter] to continue or press the toggle button and click
Done.
9. If you clicked Continue, you are ready to continue digitizing.
Repeat steps 5-8.
If you clicked Done, you can:
Set up to digitize another sloping line by repeating steps 1-9.
OR
Click Cancel to close the Sloping Line Input dialog box.

Digitizing Data 4
Digitizing Method 2: Known Elevations:

Note – You can follow each of these instructions using only the
digitizer cursor.
1. Select the Known Elevations option.
2. Enter the starting elevation of the sloping line in the Initial
Elevation field.
every surface, you can use the Multiple Surface Input feature
Surface Input feature on or off as necessary. See Multiple
Surface Input, page 90 for more information.
4. Place your cursor at a point on the sloping line, and digitize the
point. The Sloping Line Elevation dialog box appears.
5. Enter the new elevation in the Elevation field.
6. Click Continue or Done.
7. If you click Continue, you are ready to digitize the next point.
Repeat steps 4-7.
8. If you click Done, you can:
Set up to digitize another sloping line by repeating steps 1-6.
OR
Click Cancel to close the Sloping Line Input dialog box.
4.6 Digitizing Point Data

Point data includes elevation points, boreholes, and cut stake points.
Boreholes (Substrata Surfaces) will be discussed later in this chapter.
When you digitize point data, you can use only the point method of
digitizing; you cannot stream in point data. Digitize each point one at
a time.

4 Digitizing Data
4.6.1 Elevation Points

Elevation points are individual points with an associated elevation.
Elevation points are unconnected data. Only one grid cell intersection
is assigned a value by an elevation point. Elevation points influence
the surrounding grid cell intersections.
To digitize elevation points:

Digitize Elevation Points dialog box appears (see the figure
below).
OR
Select Edit / Draw (Digitize) / Elevation Points. The Digitize
Elevation Points dialog box appears (below).

2. Select either the Digitize or Keyboard option.
3. Enter the elevation of the point(s) in the Elevation field.
4. Click Start.
5. If you selected Digitize:

Digitizing Data 4
a. Digitize the point(s).

b. When you are finished digitizing points of the set
elevation, press [Enter] on the keyboard or on your cursor.
6. If you selected Keyboard, the Keyboard Input dialog box
appears (below).
a. Enter the northing of the point in the N field.

b. Enter the easting of the point in the E field.
c. Click OK.
d. Repeat steps a-c until you are finished entering points for
that elevation.
7. To create more points, repeat steps 4-6.
OR
Click Cancel to close the Elevation Points dialog box.
4.6.2 Cut Stake Points

Cut stake points do not influence the elevation of a surface. Use them
to report elevation and/or cut/fill information at digitized locations.
This information is reported in the Cut/Fill Location report. You can
create cut stakes either in the Surface Data screen or generate them in
the Cut/Fill Locations report. Use cut stakes for verifying surveyor’s
staking elevations.

4 Digitizing Data
To digitize cut stakes:

2. Click . The Cut Stakes dialog box appears (see the figure
below).
OR
Select Edit / Draw (Digitize) /Cut Stakes. The Cut Stakes dialog
box appears (below).
3. Select either the Digitize or the Keyboard mode option.

4. Click Start.
5. If you selected Digitize:
a. Digitize the point(s) where you want to place cut stakes.
b. When you are finished digitizing points, press [Enter] on the
keyboard or on your cursor.
6. If you selected keyboard, the Cut Stakes dialog box appears (see
below).
a. Enter the X (or N) coordinate of the point in the X field.

b. Enter the Y (or E) coordinate of the point in the Y field.

Digitizing Data 4
c. Click Accept.
d. Repeat steps a-c until you are finished entering points.
e. Click Cancel when you are finished.
7. To create another set of cut stake points, repeat step 4 or 5.
OR
Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
Note – You can also generate cut stakes in the Cut/Fill Locations
report. See Chapter 9, Running the Reports for details.

4 Digitizing Data
4.7 Entering Substrata Data

A borehole is a small hole drilled into the earth's surface. The data
gathered from a borehole includes the types of material and the depth
at which they are encountered. Use boreholes to create substrata
surfaces from the current surface.
To digitize boreholes:
1. If SiteWork is not in digitize mode, click . Click .
OR
Select Edit / Draw (Digitize) / Boreholes.
2. Digitize the borehole point. The Borehole Values dialog box
appears (below).

Digitizing Data 4
3. To change the initial surface, select your choice from the Initial
Surface list.
4. To change the coordinates of the borehole point, enter a new
coordinate in the X or Y field.
5. Enter an elevation in the Z field.
6. Select an option from the Surface Elevations by choices.
7. Enter the name of the next surface in the first line in the Surface
Name section.
8. Press the down arrow key on your keyboard. If you do
not move to the next line, your surface will NOT be created.
9. Repeat steps 3 - 8 until you are finished creating surfaces for the
borehole.
10. Enter the elevation or depth of the surface (depending on the
option you selected in step 6) in the Value field adjacent to the
corresponding surface name.
11. Click OK when you are finished with the current borehole.
12. To create another borehole, repeat steps 2-11.
OR
Press [Enter] if you are finished creating boreholes.
To calculate substrata volumes:

1. In the volume reports, select the substrata surface as the initial
surface.
2. Select Proposed as the final surface. The cut volume is the
substrata excavation.
3. Ignore the fill volume.

4 Digitizing Data
4.8 Copying Enclosed Entities

You can reduce your digitizing time and possibly digitizing error by
copying enclosed entities where applicable. You can copy a sloping
area to a subgrade adjustment, AOI, or master AOI; you can copy a
subgrade adjustment to a subgrade adjustment, AOI, or master AOI;
you can copy a pad to subgrade adjustment, AOI, or master AOI; and
you can copy an AOI or master AOI to a subgrade adjustment. For
example, if you have several subgrade adjustments stacked one on top
of another, you can copy subgrade adjustment after subgrade
adjustment without redigitizing.
4.8.1 Setting up to Copy

SiteWork is set up so you can copy as many enclosed entities as you
need to with as few steps as possible. When you are in the surface data
window and you set up to copy, you are in copy mode until you set up
to change, set up to delete, set up to digitize, or close out of the surface
data screen.
To set up to copy enclosed entities:

Click .
OR
Select Edit / Copy and select the data type to be copied.
Note – If you have not digitized your reference points for this session,
a dialog box appears asking you to digitize your reference points.

Digitizing Data 4
4.8.2 Copying a Subgrade Adjustment

To reduce digitizing time and errors, you can copy the subgrade
adjustment to a subgrade adjustment, AOI, pad, or master AOI.
To copy a subgrade adjustment:

1. If SiteWork is not in copy mode, click .
2. Click . The Copy dialog box appears (below).
3. In the Entity list, select the subgrade adjustment you want to

copy.
4. Select one of the options to which the adjustment will be made
from the To section: Subgrade Adjustment, Area of Interest,
Pad, or Master AOI.
5. Enter a name for the new subgrade adjustment, area of interest,
pad, or master AOI in the Name field.

4 Digitizing Data

OR
7. If you want to use a conversion factor, select the Conversion
Factor check box.
8. If you are copying to a subgrade adjustment or pad, enter a
thickness for the new subgrade adjustment in the Thickness
field.
9. If you are copying to a pad, enter an elevation in the Elevation
field.
10. If you want the pad boundary to act as a contour line and affect
the surrounding grid elevations, select the Boundary Contour at
Elevation check box.
11. If you do not want subgrade adjustments to affect the entity's
elevation, select the Protect Entity from Subgrade Adjustment
check box.
12. Click Copy to copy the subgrade adjustment.
13. To copy another subgrade adjustment to a different subgrade
adjustment, AOI, or pad, repeat steps 3-12.
14. When you are finished copying, click Done.

Digitizing Data 4
4.8.3 Copying a Pad

To reduce digitizing time and errors, you can copy the pad to a
subgrade adjustment, AOI, or master AOI.
To copy a pad:
1. If SiteWork is not in copy mode, click . Click . The
Copy dialog box appears (see figure below).
OR
Select Edit / Copy / Pads. The Copy dialog box appears (below).
2. Select the pad you want to copy from the Entity list.
3. Select an option to specify where the pad will be copied:
Subgrade Adjustment, Area of Interest, or Master AOI.
or master AOI in the Name field.

4 Digitizing Data

OR
6. If you are copying to a subgrade adjustment, enter a thickness
for the subgrade adjustment in the Thickness field.
7. If you want the boundary to act as a contour or sloping line and
affect the surrounding grid elevations, select the Boundary
Contour at Elevation check box.
check box.
9. Click Copy to copy the pad.
10. To copy another pad or the same pad to a different subgrade
adjustment or AOI, repeat steps 3-9.

Digitizing Data 4
4.8.4 Copying a Sloping Area

If you would like to reduce your digitizing time and possible digitizing
errors, you can copy the sloping area to a subgrade adjustment, AOI,
pad, or master AOI.
To copy a sloping area:

OR
Select Edit / Copy / Sloping Areas. The Copy dialog box
appears (below).
2. Select the sloping area you want to copy from the Entity list.

4 Digitizing Data
3. Select an option to specify where the sloping area will be

copied: Subgrade Adjustment, Pad, Area of Interest, or Master
AOI.
pad, or master AOI in the Name field.
OR
6. If you are copying to a subgrade adjustment, enter a thickness
for the subgrade adjustment in the Thickness field.
field.
check box.
10. Click Copy to copy the sloping area.
11. To copy another sloping area or the same sloping area to a
different subgrade adjustment, AOI, or pad, repeat steps 3-11.

Digitizing Data 4
4.8.5 Copying an AOI

If you would like to reduce your digitizing time and the possibility of
digitizing errors, you can copy the AOI to a subgrade adjustment.
To copy an AOI:
OR
Select Edit / Copy / Areas of Interest. The Copy dialog box
appears (below).
2. Select the AOI you want to copy from the Entity list.
OR

4 Digitizing Data
If you want to copy the master AOI, select the Master AOI
check box. Select an option to specify where the AOI will be
copied: Subgrade Adjustment or Pad.
3. Enter a name for the new subgrade adjustment in the Name
field.
OR
5. Enter a thickness for the subgrade adjustment in the Thickness
field.
Factor check box.
field.
check box.
10. Click Copy to copy the AOI.
11. To copy another AOI, repeat steps 3-11.
4.9 Copying Line Data

To reduce your digitizing time and the possibility of errors, you can
use SiteWork to copy sloping lines and contour lines. You can copy
line data to a horizontal and vertical offset or to an enclosed entity,
such as a pad or a subgrade adjustment.

Digitizing Data 4
To copy a contour or sloping line to an enclosed entity:

1. If SiteWork is not in copy mode, click . To copy a sloping
line, click , or to copy a contour line, click . The Copy
To dialog box appears (see figure below).
OR
Select Edit / Copy. To copy a sloping line, select Sloping Line.
To copy a contour line, select Contour Line. Pick a point on the
line you want to copy. The Copy To dialog box appears (see
figure below).
2. Make sure that the Enclosed Entity tab is selected.

3. Select whether you want to copy the line data to a Subgrade
Adjustment, a Pad, an AOI, or a Master AOI.
4. Enter a name for the new entity in the Name field.

4 Digitizing Data
5. Enter the name of the group you want the entity to use in the
Group field.
OR,
6. If you want to use a conversion factor (a number which allows
SiteWork to convert the cubic yardage of your enclosed entity
into a weight measurement), select the Conversion Factor check
box.
7. (Subgrade adjustments and pads only) Enter the thickness of
the entity in the Thickness field.
8. (Pads only) Enter the elevation of the entity in the Elevation
field.
9. (Pads only) If you want the boundary to act as a contour or
sloping line and affect the surrounding grid elevations, select
the Boundary Contour at Elevation check box.
10. (Pads only) If you do not want subgrade adjustments to affect
the volumes in the pad, select the Protect Entity from Subgrade
Adjustment check box.
11. If you want to delete the original entity you selected, select
Delete Selected Entity.
12. Click Save to add the new entity to the drawing.
13. If you selected the Conversion Factor check box, the Group
Conversion Factor dialog box appears. Set the conversion
factor for the group, then click OK.
14. SiteWork connects the last point of the selected line to the first
point, creating an enclosed area, and converts it to the entity you
have specified. Select another entity to continue copying, or
press [Enter] to exit Copy Line Data.

Digitizing Data 4
To copy a sloping line or a contour line to an offset:

1. If SiteWork is not in copy mode, click . To copy a sloping
line, click , or to copy a contour line, click .
OR
Select Edit / Copy. To copy a sloping line, select Sloping Line.
To copy a contour line, select Contour Line.
2. Pick a point on the line you want to copy. The Copy To dialog
3. Click the Enclosed Entity or Sloping lines tab.

4 Digitizing Data
4. Enter a positive or negative offset value in the Horizontal Offset

field. If you select Delete Selected Entity, you can enter a
horizontal offset of zero in this field. The preview window in
the Copy To dialog box shows the relative locations of the
original line and the new line (dashed line, see figure below).
5. Enter a positive or negative offset value in the Vertical Offset

field. The vertical offset allows you change the elevation of the
new line. For example, if you are copying a contour line with an
elevation of 20 and enter 1 in the vertical offset box, the new
contour line will have an elevation of 21. If you are copying a
sloping line, the vertical offset changes the elevation of each
point on the sloping line. Thus, if you copy a sloping line with 3
points having elevations of 20, 25, and 30 to a vertical offset
of.5, the new line will have three points with elevations of 20.5,
25.5, and 30.5.

Digitizing Data 4
6. When you are satisfied with the location of the new line, click
Save to add it to your drawing. You can then continue copying.
Click Done when you are finished, and then press [Enter] to exit
Copy Line Data.
OR
If you are not satisfied with the location of the line, click Done
without clicking Save to close the dialog box without adding
the line. Press [Enter] to exit Copy Line Data.

4 Digitizing Data
4.10 Multiple Surface Input

Multiple Surface Input (formerly called daylighting) lets you digitize
information to more than one surface at a time. Use this feature when
you need to digitize elevation points, contour lines, sloping lines,
sloping areas, subgrade adjustments, or pads. Areas of Interest are
automatically on every surface, so you cannot and do not need to use
the multiple surface input feature when adding AOIs.
Multiple Surface Input can be toggled on and off as you digitize. For
example, let's say you need to digitize some contour lines where each
proposed contour line joins an existing contour line at some point. You
can turn on Multiple Surface Input, digitize the part of the contour line
that is the same for both surfaces, turn off Multiple Surface Input, and
digitize the rest of the existing contour line. Then you can turn
Multiple Surface Input back on for the next contour line.
To use multiple surface input:

Multiple Surface Input dialog box appears.
OR
Select Edit / Multiple Surface Input. The Multiple Surface Input
dialog box appears (see figure on next page).
2. Highlight the surfaces for which you want to digitize the
information. If you want to select all the surfaces in your
drawing, click All.
3. Click OK.

Digitizing Data 4
4. Digitize the information you want to input to multiple surfaces.
5. When you are finished using Multiple Surface Input (even

temporarily):
Click .
OR
Select Edit / Multi-Surface Input.

4 Digitizing Data
4.11 Control Points

Sometimes it is easier to work in relative mode then convert to field
mode when you are ready to export files for use in the field. SiteWork
lets you convert from relative to field mode using control points.
However, you cannot switch from Field mode to Relative mode. Once
you set your control points, they cannot be changed. We suggest you
copy or archive your project before you use control points.
To switch from relative mode to field mode while you are

working in a project:
Note – You can redraw the screen or use the zoom features as
necessary as you digitize items.
Control Point Orientation dialog box appears (see below).
OR
Select Edit / Draw (Digitize) / Control Points. The Control Point
Orientation dialog box appears (below).
2. Enter the field coordinate for the first control point in the
Control Point #1 Northing field.

Digitizing Data 4
3. Repeat step 2 for the other three coordinates.

Note – When you choose to use control points, all of your
coordinates will be changed from relative to field values. You
cannot change or delete control points, so make sure you type in
the coordinates and digitize the points very carefully.
4. Click OK. A warning appears asking if you are sure the
coordinates are correct.
5. Verify that the numbers are correct, then click Yes.
6. Digitize the control points. The compass updates to the new
orientation. Make sure the orientation is correct.
7. Click OK.

4 Digitizing Data
4.12 Editing with a Mouse

You can use your mouse to create, edit or delete objects, although we
recommend that you use a digitizer for entering data. Mouse edit
functionality is very similar to digitizer functionality.
4.12.1 Differences between Mouse and Digitizer

The main difference between using the digitizer and using the mouse
is that the digitizer uses absolute positioning. That is, any given point
on the digitizer tablet represents a fixed point in the drawing, and
every time the cursor is over that area of the tablet, the screen cursor is
located over the same point on the screen. With a mouse, on the other
hand, positioning is relative: the mouse could be located anywhere on
the mousepad for any point on the screen.
What does all this mean for you, the user? First, it means that you
don't have to use reference points when editing with a mouse.
Reference points are used only to indicate to the PC where the
drawing is located on the tablet. Second, it means that it is not possible
to “digitize;” i.e., trace data directly from a drawing with the mouse.
Also, since a mouse generally has two or three buttons, compared with
16 on a digitizer cursor, you have to input any numeric information,
along with [Enter], on the keyboard. Apart from these limitations,
mouse edit functionality works just like digitizer functionality.
Note – When editing with a mouse, it is still necessary to select a point
to select an object.
To edit with a mouse:

1. To turn on the Mouse Edit mode, click .
OR
Select Edit | Mouse Edit.

Digitizing Data 4
2. Select as you normally would.

To add a new AOI, click , then click .
To change a contour, click , then click .
To delete a pad, click , then click .
3. When you've finished editing, press [Enter].
4.13 Doing a Multiple-Page Takeoff

Sometimes the information for a surface cannot fit on one page of your
site plans. Unless you have a huge digitizer board, it is unlikely that
you would be able to tape the drawing sheets together and then
digitize the information as you normally would. However, SiteWork's
field coordinates let you handle a multiple-page takeoff. Most of the
things you will do for a multiple-page takeoff you already know how
to do from doing single-page takeoffs.
To do a multiple-page takeoff:
1. If you plan to do a multiple-page takeoff for a project, make
sure you have Field Coordinates selected in the More
Preferences dialog box before you create the project.
2. Tape the first page of the plans to your digitizer board.
3. Set up the project, and go into the surface data screen. (See
Chapter 2, Getting Started for step-by-step instructions.)
4. Digitize your reference points and your data. (See Digitizing,
page 47 for step-by-step instructions.) Do NOT set up the
master AOI like you normally would.
5. When you are finished digitizing that page, remove it from the
digitizer board.
6. Tape the next page of the plans to your digitizer board.

4 Digitizing Data
Note – If you are using relative mode for your coordinates,

follow the instructions in the previous section to use control
points to convert the project to field mode. You can use relative
mode if the reference points you choose are on both plans.
7. Relocate the drawing using reference points on the new plan
sheet.
8. Repeat steps 3-6 until your takeoff of the surface is finished.
9. When you are finished inputting all the data you need for the
surface, create a master AOI using the Mouse Edit feature.
10. Change to the next surface and follow this procedure for that
surface. Now you can run reports and print out just as you
normally would.

This chapter has shown you how to digitize data in SiteWork. See
Chapter 5, Importing Data for step-by-step instructions on how to
import data into SiteWork. See Chapter 7, Editing Data: Changing
What You’ve Done for step-by-step instructions on how to change or
delete what you have done.

CHAPTER
5
Importing Data 5
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q Importing
Q QuickPoint
Importing Data 5
5.1 Introduction
Importing data from a file or a total station is probably the easiest way
to input data into a surface. This chapter explains how to import from
all the file types available to SiteWork and how to download data
directly from some total stations. See Chapter 4, Digitizing Data for
information about digitizing your data.
You can reduce manual input by transferring data between SiteWork
and Terramodel, other CAD programs, and text and total station
survey files. You can even upload and/or download data directly
between SiteWork and the Constructor, Geodimeter, or Geodat.
5.1.1 Advantages to Importing

Importing data has two major advantages over digitizing data: saving
time and gaining accuracy. Digitizing a complicated surface can take
hours. If you have a file containing that surface, you can import it in
seconds.
Files you import are exact. You just need to be careful to make sure the
surfaces are in separate files before you begin importing.
5.1.2 Surfaces and Importing

The concept of SiteWork's surfaces are the same whether you import
or digitize. (See Chapter 3, Using the Data Window for an explanation
of working with SiteWork's surfaces.) SiteWork will not create a new
surface for you when you import. You need to have the surface into
which you want to import open when you import. If you import a
second surface, make sure you switch to that surface before you start
importing.

5 Importing Data
5.1.3 Coordinates and Importing

When you import, SiteWork adopts whatever coordinate system you
have set up. Whatever mode you are using, be sure to put in the correct
scale for the project to make sure your printouts are printed correctly.
5.1.4 What Needs to be in an Imported File

Before you import, make sure each surface you are importing is in a
separate file. If an engineering firm gives you a CAD file, have the
engineers turn on only the applicable layers for each surface.
Otherwise, the time you gain by importing may be spent deleting a lot
of data you won't need for that surface. (If the engineering firm refuses
to separate the surfaces for you and you have Paydirt's QuickPoint,
you can turn layers on or off yourself.) Also, make sure the file
includes elevations. Without the Z (elevation) information, SiteWork
does not have the data it needs to calculate the volumes.
5.1.5 Your Experience

Your experience as an estimator plays a very important role when you
use an estimating tool. Importing may give you the advantages listed
above, but it does not eliminate the need for you to carefully scrutinize
the plan and its data in SiteWork among other things. You will need to
add AOIs. You may need to remove certain data that you feel will not
improve the surface model. You will need to add thicknesses to your
pads and subgrade adjustments to get to subgrade. You may need to
digitize lines to connect data points to improve your surface model. (If
you have QuickPoint, you can quickly connect the points on the screen
then send the file to a SiteWork surface.)
5.2 Importing
Geodat, or Geodimeter into SiteWork to save time digitizing data.
You can import any of the following file types:

Importing Data 5
AutoCAD DXF (*.dxf)†

AutoCAD DWG (*.dwg)†
GDX Format (*.gdx)
Constructor (*.job, *.are)
Generic (ASCII) Text (*.txt)
Geodat (*.job)
Geodimeter (*.job)
Nikon (*.txt, *.d48, *.raw)
Sokkia SDR2, SDR3 (*.sdr)
Pentax DR1 (*.ptx)
+3 Tri Files (*.tri)
TDS-95 Coord/Raw (*.cr5, *.rw5)
Wild (*.wld)
GeoStar (*.gps)‡
†Layers, Blocks, UCSs, and all data type information will import.
Note – This list of file types was complete at the time this manual was
printed. However, your SiteWork may be able to import other file
types, because we are continually improving this product. All the file
types SiteWork is able to import are listed in the Files of Type drop-
down list box in the first Import dialog box.
5.2.1 Importing from Terramodel

You can import surface and other CAD information into SiteWork
using Terramodel’s extensive import capabilities. Follow the steps on
the next pages to import, refine and verify your data.
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide 10 1

5 Importing Data
To import:
1. Start SiteWork.
2. Select Project / New to begin a new project.
OR
Select Project / Open to open the project into which you want to
import data.
3. Select Tools / Import / Using Terramodel. SiteWork will launch
Terramodel and open the Available import scripts dialog box
(below).
Note – If the Available import scripts dialog box does not

appear, type import on the command line of the Terramodel
window.
4. Select the type of file you want to import from the list, then
click Run script. The appropriate dialog box will open
according to the type of import script you selected. Follow the
steps in it and subsequent dialog boxes until the data has been
imported into Terramodel.
Importing into Terramodel allows you to choose and modify the
information you need to import. You can:
– Turn off layers you don’t want to transfer to SiteWork, or
delete empty layers.
– Join sets or polylines, change CAD properties of objects.

Importing Data 5
– Use Terramodel’s QuickLSet command to change the

properties of layers.
– Select File / System configuration / Change menus in
Terramodel to select the Paydirt SiteWork Cad menu. This
menu gives you access to the commands you’ll use most
often when you transfer data from Terramodel to SiteWork.
Once you have made the necessary changes to the data, you can
export it from Terramodel into SiteWork. Only one surface can
be exported at a time.
5. Click on the Terramodel Toolbar
OR
Enter export sitework on the Terramodel command line and
press [Enter]. The Send to Sitework dialog box appears (below).
6. Select the Existing or Proposed surface from the Export to

surface list. This is the layer in Sitework on which the exported
data will be stored.

5 Importing Data
OR
Enter a new surface name in the Export to surface field. If the
surface does not exist in SiteWork, it will be created.
7. Click Pick objects. Use any of Terramodel’s selection options
to choose the data you want to export. To select individual
objects, use the Select by record option. To select groups of
objects, you can use either the Select by Layer option or the
Select by Window option.
8. Click Pick Reference Points. These two points serve as
orientation points that SiteWork can use to orient the data on the
screen to the drawing on your digitizing board. These points set
the scale and rotation of the incoming data. You can enter
reference points in one of two ways:
– Type the north and east (or X and Y) coordinate values in
the Pt1 and Pt2 fields on the Terramodel command bar.
– Pick two points on the screen that represent the reference
points. If you have data in the SiteWork project into which
this data will be exported, you must select two points or
enter coordinates that match the reference points in
SiteWork.
If you will not be digitizing data into the SiteWork project, you
can also select the Skip Reference check box. In this situation,
the extents of the imported data will become the reference
points in SiteWork.
9. Click Finish to complete the export.
10. Repeat steps 5 – 9 to export subsequent surfaces into SiteWork.
For subsequent surfaces, you can select the Skip reference check
box to avoid selecting reference points.
11. Select File / Exit in Terramodel. Click No in the Save changes
dialog box to discard the temporary Terramodel project file. If
you would like to save the Terramodel file, select File / Save
project as and assign a project name before exiting Terramodel.

Importing Data 5
12. After you close Terramodel, you will see a blank screen in
SiteWork.
Select View / Refresh
OR
Press [F5]
OR
Click . Your imported data will appear on the screen.
5.2.2 Importing from a Total Station
Before you import from a total station:

1. Make sure the cable is connected properly to both the computer
and the device.
2. Make sure the computer and the device are turned on.
Note – If you import data from a total station and your surface model
does not look right, try using QuickPoint to edit the file. QuickPoint
comes with the Constructor total station, but you can also buy
QuickPoint without buying the Constructor. See the QuickPoint section
at the end of this chapter for more information about QuickPoint.
To import:
1. While in the Data window, select Tools / Import.
2. Select File.
OR
Select Total Station.
3. A series of dialog boxes appear. Answer the questions in each
dialog box. If you need more help, click the Help button in the
dialog box.

5 Importing Data
You can save time by using SiteWork's Import Total Station feature to
download points directly from a Constructor, Geodimeter, or Geodat
to use in SiteWork.
The GTCO Wintab Enabled option lets SiteWork upload to or
download from the Constructor when you have only one COM (serial)
port on your computer and you use the GTCO Wintab driver. If you
have more than one COM port or if you use a different Wintab driver,
this menu option should ALWAYS have a check mark in front of it.
To communicate with the Constructor when you have only

one COM port and you are using the GTCO Wintab driver:
1. Select Tools / Options.
2. Clear the GTCO Wintab Enabled check box.
3. Disconnect your digitizer from your COM port.
4. Connect your Constructor to your COM port.
5. Import or export your data.
Before you receive field data:

and the device.

Importing Data 5
To receive field data:

1. Select Tools / Import / Total Station. The Import/Available
Selections dialog box appears (see below).
2. Select the name of the device from which you want to import.
3. To check or change your serial properties:
a. Click Properties. The Serial Properties dialog box
appears (see figure, below).
b. Select the correct serial properties.
c. Click OK.

5 Importing Data
4. Click OK. The Receive dialog box appears (below).
5. You can delete files from your device in this dialog box. To
delete a file from the device, highlight the name of the file in the
Files list, then click Delete.
C Warning – Once you delete a file from the device, it is gone forever.
To update the file list, click Refresh.

6. Highlight the name of the file you want to import.

Importing Data 5
7. To see and/or edit the raw data in the area or job, click Edit.
The Edit dialog box appears (see below).
Use the information in the Project, Operator, Date, and Time
fields to verify you have the correct information. When you are
finished viewing and/or editing the file, click Close.
8. Click Receive. The Data Properties dialog box appears (see

below).
Check to make sure these properties are correct for your data.
The options in the Data Properties dialog box are enabled if
they are not grayed out. To select a data property, open the list
and select the property.

5 Importing Data
9. Click OK when you are finished making your selections. The

Equivalent References dialog box appears (see below).
10. The Equivalent References dialog box ties a file coming into
SiteWork to the current drawing information.Enter in each field
the coordinates for the points in the file that correspond to your
reference points in SiteWork.
Note – If the data coming from the total station is in a different
coordinate system than what you have set up in SiteWork, you
need to input coordinates following SiteWork's coordinate
system. For example, if the data from the total station is in N-E-
Elevations and SiteWork is set up for X-Y-Z, list the reference
point coordinates as E-N rather than N-E.
11. Click OK. The Station Location dialog box appears (below).
12. Enter the north or X coordinate in the North (or X) field. Repeat
for the East (or Y) and Elev (or Z) fields.
If the Station Height field contains a zero, enter the station
height. (The station height is the distance from the dot in the
center of the logo on the side of the instrument to the ground.)

Importing Data 5
If the Prism Height field contains a zero, enter the height of the
prism. (The prism height is the measurement marked on the
range pole.)
Click OK.
13. If your file has another station location in it, the Station
Location dialog box will appear for the next location. Repeat
step 12 for the next station location. When you have entered all
station locations for your file, the data is imported into your
surface.
To restart the digitizer if it was disconnected:
1. Disconnect your Constructor from your COM port.
2. Reconnect your digitizer to your COM port.
3. Select Tools / Options / GTCO Wintab Enabled to place a check
in front of it.
5.2.3 Importing a File

You can save time by using SiteWork's Import File feature to import a
surface from a file to use in SiteWork.
Note – These instructions explain how to import a file of any type. You
will be able to skip certain steps depending on what file type you are
importing.

5 Importing Data
To import:
1. Select Tools / Import / File. The Import dialog box appears (see
below).
2. Select the file type you want to import from the List Files of
Type list.
If you know the location of the file you can type the complete
path and file name in the File Name field.
If you do not know the location of the file, locate the file using
the Look in list or change directories by clicking the file folder
icon. Once you have selected a file, its name appears in the File
name field. Click Open.
3. If you are importing a *.GDX file, proceed to step 7.
If you are importing any other file type except *.TXT,
proceed to step 4.

Importing Data 5
If you are importing a *.TXT file, the Import Generic Text

File dialog box appears (see below).
This box displays the first ten lines of the file. Files with point
numbers will have four columns of numbers. Files without point
numbers will have three columns of numbers. If the point list
does not contain point numbers, make sure the File has point
numbers check box is cleared. Click OK.
4. If you are importing any file type except *.GDX, the Data
Properties dialog box appears (see below).
The options in the Data Properties dialog box are enabled if

they are not grayed out. To select a data property, open the list.
Make sure the coordinate format displayed in the Coordinate
Systems list matches the format of the file.
Click OK when you are finished making your selections.

5 Importing Data
5. If you are importing any file type except *.DXF or *.JOB,

proceed to step 7.
If you are importing a *.JOB file, proceed to step 6.
If you are importing a *.DXF file, the Characteristics dialog
box appears (see below).
Select the point options you want included in your import. Enter
the scale of the drawing you are importing in the Scale field.
Click OK. Proceed to step 7.
6. If you are importing a *.JOB (a Constructor, Geodat, or
Geodimeter) file, the Station Location dialog box appears (see
below).
Enter the north or X coordinate in the North (or X) field. Repeat

for the East (or Y) and Elev (or Z) fields.
If the Station Height field contains a zero, enter the station
height. (The station height is the distance from the dot in the
center of the logo on the side of the instrument to the ground.)

Importing Data 5
If the Prism Height field contains a zero, enter the height of the
prism. (The prism height is the measurement marked on the
range pole.)
Click OK.
7. The Equivalent References dialog box appears (see below).
The Equivalent References dialog box ties a file coming into

SiteWork to the current drawing information. Enter in each field
the coordinates for the points in the file that correspond to your
reference points in SiteWork.
Note – If the data coming from the total station is in a different
coordinate system than what you have set up in SiteWork, you
need to input coordinates following SiteWork's coordinate
system. For example, if the data from the total station is in N-E-
Elevations and SiteWork is set up for X-Y-Z, list the reference
point coordinates as E-N rather than N-E.
Click OK. The file imports into the SiteWork surface.

5 Importing Data
5.3 QuickPoint
QuickPoint is a computer program that helps you set out points for
construction. It lets you import data from one data format, edit it
(including connecting data points with your mouse), and export it
using a different format.
For example, if you are provided with a *.DXF file of a construction
job and the *.DXF file contains data for both Existing and Proposed
surfaces plus other unwanted data, you can use QuickPoint to turn off
the data you do not want and then export the necessary data to Paydirt
SiteWork.
To edit and import data through QuickPoint:

1. Make sure you are in the surface onto which you want to bring
the data.
Note – If you have imported or digitized data in this surface,
QuickPoint will not remove it for you. If you want to remove
data you have imported or digitized, use SiteWork's Delete
features within the surface or delete the entire surface and
create a new one.
2. Select Tools / QuickPoint.
3. Import data from a file, receive data from a total station, or open
an existing drawing file in QuickPoint.
4. Edit the data using QuickPoint's editing features. QuickPoint's
editing features include connecting collected data and set-out
points, disconnecting points, moving and offsetting points, and
more. See your QuickPoint Help and User's Guide for detailed
instructions on how to use QuickPoint.
5. When you are finished editing your data, click Area, then click
Send to SiteWork. QuickPoint passes the edited data to
SiteWork, and SiteWork puts the data in the current surface.

Importing Data 5
Note – If any dialog boxes appear, answer the questions then

click on OK. If you need help as the dialog boxes appear, click
on the help button on the dialog box.
6. If you want to send another set of data to the same SiteWork
surface, repeat steps 4-6 in QuickPoint.
7. If you want to send another set of data to a different SiteWork
surface, change to the other surface in SiteWork, then repeat
steps 4-6 in QuickPoint. For detailed information on using
QuickPoint, see your QuickPoint User's Guide.

This chapter has given you step-by-step instructions on how to import
data into SiteWork, including using SiteWork's QuickPoint feature.
See Chapter 4, Digitizing Data for step-by-step instructions on how to
digitize data. See Chapter 7, Editing Data: Changing What You’ve
Done to learn how to edit your data.

5 Importing Data

CHAPTER
6
Learning About Data Types 6
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q Line data
Q Point data
Q Enclosed entities
Q Other data types
6.1 Introduction
SiteWork's data types form the surface models necessary for SiteWork
to calculate volumes. This chapter explains what each data type is,
how it affects the surface model, and when to use it. This information
is the key to creating surface models that best represent your site
plans. The data types are listed in the Data Types menu in the Surface
Data screen.
The key to accurate volume calculations is creating an accurate
surface model. As we explained in Chapter 2, Getting Started,
SiteWork uses a grid cell method to calculate the cut and fill volumes
for a drawing. It compares one surface's grid to another. The surface
model is based on the grid that is generated for each surface. Different
data types affect the surface's grid in different ways, so it is wise to
understand just how a data type will affect the grid. You should also
learn how to digitize the data type to achieve the affect you want. Once
you understand these concepts, use them as you do your takeoffs for
the most accurate takeoffs possible.
SiteWork has four groups of data types: line data, point data, enclosed
entities, and data types that do not affect the grid.
Point data describes a zero-dimensional point in 3-D space, e.g. an
elevation point. Line data describes a line made up of one or several
segments in 3-D space, e.g. a contour line. Enclosed entities describe
data for an enclosed area, such as a pad or a sloping area.
6.1.1 How Data Affects the Grid

Line data and point data create the grid itself. Enclosed areas adjust
the grid after it has been created; they may or may not influence the
grid beyond their boundaries, depending on the settings when they are
created.
When line data is placed on the grid, it does not allow data on one side
of it to influence data on the other side of it (Figure 6.1). SiteWork
adds a point wherever line data touches the grid, and the line data
essentially forms a wall for grid calculations. The grid assumes the

elevation(s) of the line along the line. The line data also influences the
shape of the grid on either side of itself and extending from its end
points.
Figure 6.1 The grid assumes the elevations of the line wherever the line
intersects it
When point data is placed on the grid, the grid assumes the elevation
of the point at the point and the data influences the shape of the grid in
all directions around itself (Figure 6.2). A series of point data cannot
block the influence of other data like line data does. If your plans have
only point data, use the surface contours report to see a contour map.
Wherever possible, use contour lines or sloping lines to connect point
data. As a guideline, connect points in the direction you want water to
drain.

SiteWork adds a point

wherever line data touches
the grid.
Each data point on the line

has as much influence as
each elevation point.
This area of the grid will

have an elevation of about
17.
Figure 6.2 Point data and line data work together to form the grid
When enclosed entities are placed on the grid, the grid assumes the
elevation(s) of the entity within the boundary of the enclosed entity
(Figure 6.3 through Figure 6.6). If you want the boundary of a pad or
sloping area to influence the model outside of the entity boundary,
select the Boundary Contour/Sloping Line check box. This works the
same as digitizing a contour or sloping line at the finished grade
elevation around the entity.

Plan View Cross Section View
Contour Cut Area

Lines Fill Area
Pad
Cross Section
Marker
Figure 6.3 Enclosed entities with Boundary/Contour at Elevation turned off affect the grid
only within their boundaries
Contour or
Sloping Line
Pad
Cross Section
Marker
Figure 6.4 Enclosed entities with Boundary/Contour at Elevation turned off affect the grid
only within their boundaries
Contour or
Sloping Line
Pad with
Influence
Cross Section
Marker
Figure 6.5 Use enclosed entities with Boundary/Contour at Elevation turned on to change
the shape of the grid


Contour or
Sloping Line
Cross Section
Marker
Figure 6.6 Two contours at 90 and 100 create a sloped cross-section
6.2 Line Data

Line data consists of two or more connected points. The points for the
line data can be digitized or imported. SiteWork generates additional
data points wherever line data intersects a grid line. Contour lines and
sloping lines are line data.
6.2.1 Contour Lines

A contour line is line data with a constant elevation. Every point along
a contour line has the same elevation.
When to use contour lines

Use contour lines wherever contour lines are shown on the plans.
Use a sloping line around building pads where the elevation of the
building pad is not constant.
Contour Lines and AOIs
Before we discuss digitizing contour lines, you need to understand
how contour lines work with areas of interest. SiteWork draws the grid
using all the data you enter. Cut and fill volumes are calculated to the
limits of the chosen area of interest (AOI). AOIs separate areas of

grading from areas of non-grading. You might reason that if the AOI is
the boundary, you do not need to digitize contour lines beyond the
AOI. However, if you follow this reasoning, your volumes will not be
what you expect because your surface model will not accurately
reflect the data at the site.
Figure 6.7 Min/Max Data
The grid itself is as large as your min/max data (Figure 6.7). For
SiteWork to create the grid properly, input your data completely, even
beyond the AOI. In Figure 6.8, if you do not digitize contour 90, the
80 elevation will carry straight through to the ends of the AOI instead
of creating the hill that is actually there. Your volumes will be

incorrect.
Figure 6.8 Use line data with enclosed entities to change the shape of the
grid
The influence of line data can be far-reaching, even through non-

grading areas, if you do not have data that can block that influence.
Figure 6.8 shows what happens when you digitize existing contours up

to the AOI and you do not digitize through the area of non-grading.
AOI - - - -
Area of Non-
grading
Figure 6.9 What happens when you do not account for an area of non-grading
Contour 903 influences all the way down to the area below contour
900 because no data blocks its influence. Likewise, contours 900, 901,
and 902 (to the left of the non-grading area) influences the area just
below contour 902 (to the right of the non-grading area). The surface
model for the area between contour 903 and 902 will not look the way
it should look because contour 902 will not have proper influence on
the area. In short, your surface model for this surface will not reflect
the data on the plans, and your volumes will not be what you expect.

When you have a situation where contour lines go through an area of

non-grading then continue into another area of grading, consider the
size of the area of non-grading before you decide how to digitize that
area of the plans. If the area of non-grading is fairly small and/or the
area has relatively few contour lines, digitize the contour lines through
the area of non-grading (Figure 6.10).
AOI - - - -
Area of Non-
grading
Figure 6.10 Digitize through the area of non-grading
When you digitize through an area of non-grading, the contours are

able to block data where they should and the surface model reflects
what the plans say they should. In Figure 6.8, the influence from
contour 903 is properly blocked by contour 902, so the area between
contour 903 and 902 will look the way it should and the area below the
contour 900 will not be influenced by contour 903 at all. Likewise, the
influence from contour 900 is properly blocked by contour 901. A
surface digitized in this manner will produce an accurate surface
model.

If the area of non-grading is large and/or the plans have numerous

contour lines, you can achieve the same kind of results by digitizing a
sloping line that connects the contour lines (Figure 6.11 and
Figure 6.12). See the discussion on sloping lines later in this chapter
for more information on sloping lines and how they affect the grid.
AOI - - - -
Area of Non-grading
Figure 6.11 Numerous contour lines going through an area of non-grading

AOI - - - -
Sloping line
Type in an elevation at
each contour line.
Area of Non-grading
Figure 6.12 Digitize a sloping line just outside of the AOI connecting the contour lines
Now consider the situation shown in Figure 6.13. Contour 932 and
933 are both completely outside of the area of grading limits (our
AOI). Contours 934 and 935 are partially in the AOI and partially out.
Contours 936 and 937 are completely inside the AOI.

You do not need to digitize

this contour line.
AOI - - - -
You do not need to digitize

these parts of these contour
lines.
Figure 6.13 Where to stop digitizing contour lines
Of course you need to digitize contours that are inside the AOI, but
where do you stop digitizing the contours that are partially in and
partially out of the AOI? The simple answer is: You stop digitizing the
contour line where it stops influencing the data within the AOI.
Contour 935 runs along the AOI, so you need to digitize the entire
contour. Contour 934 stops influencing data within the AOI just past
the bend as shown by the hash mark, so you need to digitize the part of
the contour line shown here in black. Although contour 933 is
completely outside the AOI, it will influence the shape of the surface
model as indicated by the arrows up to about where you see the hash
mark, so you need to digitize the part of that contour that is shown
here in black. Contour 932, however, has no influence on any of the
data inside the AOI, so you do not need to digitize it at all.

Remember, when you digitize contour lines, consider how they affect
the surface model. When you digitize contour lines that continue
beyond the AOI (or butt up against the AOI), it is important to digitize
the contour lines through the AOI. Likewise, digitize any contour lines
that might affect the data inside the AOI even if the contour lines are
outside of the AOI. When inputting data it is better to include too
much data than too little.
Contour lines and surfaces

Let's say you have a set of plans with the situation shown in
Figure 6.14: proposed contour lines tying into existing contour lines.
Digitizing the existing contour lines is straightforward: you simply
trace the existing contour lines with your digitizer cursor (below). But
how do you digitize the proposed contours?
Figure 6.14 Proposed contour lines tie into existing contour lines
As we discussed earlier in this section, you need to digitize contour

lines through the AOI. The proposed contour lines in Figure 6.14 do
not even touch the AOI because of where they tie into the existing
contour lines. (Remember, what you digitize on one surface does not
transfer to any other surface unless you use the daylight feature.) If

you were to digitize the proposed contour lines as they are shown in
Figure 6.14, the contour lines would influence the grid as shown in
Figure 6.15, and your volumes would not be what you should expect.
Figure 6.15 Existing contour lines
To produce an accurate surface model when your proposed contour

lines tie into the existing contour lines, you can either daylight the
parts of the existing contour lines that should be on both surfaces or

you can digitize the existing contour lines as part of the proposed
contour lines. The resulting proposed surface in this example should
look like that shown in Figure 6.17, below.
Figure 6.16 Proposed contour lines digitized to tie marks
Figure 6.17 Proposed contour lines digitized to tie marks

What to do about abruptly-ending contour lines

Sometimes contour lines end abruptly within the AOI. This situation
can be OK if those contour lines are surrounded by other entities that
will create the proper surface model. For example, in Figure 6.18
below, some of the proposed contour lines end abruptly. Notice,
however, they end where the surrounding contour lines become more
regular. Because of the way these contour lines are enclosed by other
contour lines that define a more regular area, the surface model will be
calculated as you expect.
Figure 6.18 Digitize contour lines like these exactly as they are drawn
When you Don't need to digitize contour lines

Sometimes digitizing every single contour line on the plan can be
counterproductive. If your plans have a set of contour lines drawn
close together that follow a regular pattern as shown in Figure 6.19
and Figure 6.20, digitize only a few of the contour lines that are a set
distance apart. For example, digitize only every third or fifth line. You
will save digitizing time and your surface model and volumes will be
accurate. You should digitize contour lines that represent a change

from one contour to the next. As you use SiteWork more and more,
you will know what contours you can safely leave out of your
digitized data.
Figure 6.19 You do not always need to digitize every contour line
Figure 6.20 You may need to digitize some sloping lines when you omit
certain contour lines

6.2.2 Sloping Lines

A sloping line is line data containing at least two points where the
elevation can vary and the slope between points is constant. Sloping
lines can be used interchangeably with contour lines as long as the
sloping line is restricted to one elevation.
When to use sloping lines

Use sloping lines for curb lines, cul-de-sacs, and drainage flow lines.
Use them around parking lots, retaining walls, and building pads when
the pad is set into a hill (see Figure 6.21). When you use them around
retaining walls, digitize and put in elevations up to the edge of the
building and put in elevations at each contour line (see Figure 6.22,
next page).
Figure 6.21 Digitize a sloping line around retaining walls and building pads
that are set into a hill

Type in an elevation at the edges

of the building.
Sloping Line
Type in an elevation at each

contour line.
Figure 6.22 Digitize the sloping line around retaining walls up to the edge of the building.
Use sloping lines to connect spot elevations on hills or drainage swales

to improve the surface model (see Figure 6.23 and Figure 6.24). When
you connect spot elevations, follow water flow lines. As you use
SiteWork more and more, you will know what parts of your plan need
sloping lines.
Figure 6.23 Digitize a sloping line along drainage flow lines

Figure 6.24 Digitize a sloping line to prevent unwanted influence from spot
elevations
When you digitize sloping lines

You can create a sloping line in one of two ways: Calculate Between
Known Points and Known Elevations.
The Calculate Between Known Points method of creating a sloping
line requires a starting elevation and at least one other elevation, but it
does not require an elevation at every point. SiteWork calculates the
elevations of the points you digitized without typing in elevations.
The calculated sloping line is the most versatile data type in SiteWork.
You can use this method, for example, if you are digitizing a cul-de-
sac where you know the elevations of three points around the curve
(see Figure 6.25). SiteWork will calculate the elevations all the way
around the curve based on the three elevations you know.

Figure 6.25 Use the Calculate between known elevations method to digitize
a sloping line around a cul-de-sac
The Known Elevations method of creating sloping lines requires an

elevation for every digitized point. SiteWork prompts you for an
elevation for each point, which makes input go quickly, but this
method limits flexibility.

6.3 Point Data

Point data consists of individual points that are not connected. Point
data can be digitized or imported. Elevation points are point data.
6.3.1 Elevation Points

Elevation points are individual points with an associated elevation.
Only one grid cell intersection is assigned a value by an elevation
point. Elevation points influence the surrounding grid cell
intersections.
When to use elevation points

Because elevation points influence the grid in all directions until the
influence hits some form of connected data, use elevation points
sparingly. Use elevation points when all you have are spot elevations
on the plan. Whenever possible, connect the elevation points with a
sloping line to improve your surface model.
6.3.2 Boreholes
A borehole is a geological drilling of the earth to report various levels
of strata materials. You can generate new surfaces using boreholes in
SiteWork.
When to use boreholes

Use boreholes for substrata surfaces wherever they are marked on the
plans. Boreholes influence the grid the same way elevation points do.

6.4 Enclosed Entities

Enclosed entities consist of three or more connected points. The points
can be digitized or imported. If you digitize an enclosed entity, you
must do it in a counterclockwise fashion. SiteWork reads to the left of
the line drawn to obtain the area of the enclosed entity. Areas of
interest, pads, subgrade adjustments, and sloping areas are enclosed
entities.
The Boundary Contour/Sloping Line flags, when enabled, cause pads
and sloping areas to affect the grid elevations like a contour or a
sloping line. You can set these flags for individual pads and sloping
lines.
6.4.1 Subgrade Adjustments

A subgrade adjustment is an enclosed entity with an associated
thickness that follows the lay of the surface (Figure 6.26, next page).
In other words, a subgrade adjustment has a thickness, but it does not
have an elevation and it assumes the shape of the existing grid. A
subgrade adjustment's thickness is subtracted from the grid elevation
when the thickness is typed in as a positive number: the surface's
elevations will be adjusted downward within the boundary of the
subgrade adjustment. For example, type in a positive number for
stripping topsoil. A subgrade adjustment's thickness is added to the
grid elevation when the thickness is typed in as a negative number: the

surface’s elevations will be adjusted upward within the boundary of

the subgrade adjustment. For example, type in a negative number
when you are obtaining volumes for parking lot islands.
Cross Section View
Plan View
Contour Line Thickness: 1 Thickness: -1

Subgrade
Adjustment
Cross Section
Marker
Figure 6.26 Positive numbers adjust the grid downward. Negative numbers adjust the grid
upward.
As a general rule, put subgrade adjustments that remove things before

the real excavations begins (such as an old road) on the existing
surface. Put subgrade adjustments that bring the land from finished
grade to subgrade on the proposed surface.
Subgrade Adjustments can be stacked by themselves and under pads.
When subgrade adjustments are stacked, each subgrade adjustment
adjusts the grid by its thickness (Figure 6.27, below). If one subgrade
adjustment overlaps another, they adjust the grid by the combined
thickness where they overlap.
Contour Line Thickness: 1 Thickness: -1
Subgrade
Adjustment
Cross Section
Marker Thickness: 2 Thickness: -2
Figure 6.27 When you stack or overlap subgrade adjustments, their thicknesses are added
together.

The Subgrade Adjustments Under Pads option in the Project Settings

dialog box lets you choose whether or not subgrade adjustments will
affect your subgrade elevation. Affect subgrade makes SiteWork use
pads, their thicknesses, and subgrade adjustments when determining
your subgrade elevation. Do not Affect Subgrade makes SiteWork
ignore subgrade adjustments when determining your subgrade
elevation. We recommend using Do not Affect Subgrade because it
creates a better surface model.
When to use subgrade adjustments

Use subgrade adjustments wherever there is a need to drop the surface
model down to subgrade or to raise the surface to account for material
at a higher elevation than the grid. Use them to determine the amount
of stripped and respread topsoil. Use them to determine the effect
different stripping and respread thicknesses can have on a site. Use a
zero-thickness subgrade adjustment to get cut and fill volumes for an
area of the site without affecting the surface model. Use subgrade
adjustments (grouped together) to provide material quantities and
surface areas, as well as cut and fill quantities for different areas of a
site.
Copying subgrade adjustments

You can copy enclosed entities to a subgrade adjustment. For example,
let's say you have just finished digitizing a parking lot as a subgrade
adjustment of asphalt. You need to find out how much granular
material you will need for the subbase. Just copy the subgrade
adjustment to another subgrade adjustment to reduce digitizing time
and reduce digitizing error.

6.4.2 Sloping Areas

A sloping area is an enclosed entity with a uniform slope. You may
enter a thickness to a sloping area, which will determine subgrade and
lets you report volumes for your pads.
When to use sloping areas

Use sloping areas for tennis courts, outdoor basketball courts, loading
docks, retention ponds, building pads that slope, etc.
When you digitize sloping areas

You can create a sloping area in one of two ways: using the Three
Elevation Points method or the Slope Percent method.
Copying sloping areas

You can copy a sloping area to a subgrade adjustment or AOI. Let's
say you have just finished digitizing a tennis court as a sloping area.
Underneath that tennis court you need to enter a subgrade adjustment
of gravel. Instead of redigitizing the subgrade adjustment, just copy
the sloping area to a subgrade adjustment to eliminate possible
digitizing error. Enter a thickness for the subgrade adjustment to adjust
the elevation of the tennis court to subgrade level.

6.4.3 Pads
A pad is a flat enclosed entity with only one associated elevation. You
may enter a thickness to a pad, which will determine subgrade and lets
you report volumes for your pads. The Boundary Contour at Elevation
setting will cause SiteWork to use the pad boundary as a contour line
during grid generation. Then the pad and its thickness will adjust the
grid.
When to use pads

Use a pad for any area that is uniformly flat, such as a building,
basement, etc. The Project Summary report will give you cut and fill
quantities for all pads. Use pads with sloping lines and/or contour lines
for the most accurate surface model to make sure the ground meets the
pad correctly.
6.4.4 Areas of Interest

An area of interest (AOI) defines an area for SiteWork to perform
volume calculations. AOIs have no affect on the grid. They simply act
as fences for volume calculations in all of your reports.
When to use AOIs

Before SiteWork begins its calculations, you should create at least one
AOI: the Master AOI. Typically, the limits of grading are used as the
Master AOI. The Master AOI is used as the default area for volume
calculations.
What happens when you have no AOIs

If you do not create a master AOI, your volumes may not be what you
expect. If SiteWork has no AOI, it calculates to the extents of your
data. For example, let’s say you draw your existing contours as shown
in Figure 6.28.

Figure 6.28 The area that SiteWork calculates when there is no AOI
The dotted line represents your limits of grading. This line would
represent your Master AOI if you digitized it in. If you do not digitize
the AOI, the solid box around the contour lines shows the area
SiteWork will use to calculate your volumes. SiteWork has to make a
best guess to determine what the area between the end of each contour
and the boundary line should look like. Some areas of the site that you
do not intend to grade will be included in the calculations. The
contours will lose much of their influence as “walls” for data
calculation, because they are open at their ends.
You may create as many AOIs as you need to do calculations for
specific areas of your plans without other information interfering with
the volumes.
Note – You can also copy a subgrade adjustment, pad, or sloping area
to create an AOI.

When you create an AOI

Create AOIs based on the grading areas. For example, let's say you are
building an office park and you want to do separate reports for each of
the three buildings and each of the three parking lot areas. In the
Surface Data screen, digitize a Master AOI of the entire office park
and an AOI for each of the buildings and parking lot areas. Then run
your report, selecting a different AOI as you need it.
If your site uses two or more sheets to describe the grading area, do
not create the master AOI until you have digitized in all of the sheets.
You can then use screen edit to create one large AOI.
Daylight AOIs
Daylight AOIs affect the grid in a way similar to a sloping line. A
daylight AOI is tied to the Daylight To surface (usually Existing).
Thereafter, when you create a surface with the Use Daylight AOI
check box turned on, the elevations at the daylight AOI boundary will
match those on the Daylight To surface.
Exclusion AOIs
Exclusion AOIs are areas which are excluded from the project's
volume calculations. If you designate an area as an Exclusion AOI, the
area within its boundary will be excluded from volume calculations.

6.5 Other Data Types

Some of SiteWork's data types do not affect the grid at all, but they can
be very useful. Cut stake points and control points are data types that
do not affect the grid.
6.5.1 Cut Stake Points

Cut stake points are markers for cut, fill, and neutral areas on your
plans. You can either create cut stakes in the Surface Data screen to
place them in specific locations (for example, around a pad) or
generate them in the Cut/Fill Locations report at an interval. You can
display either or both in the Cut/Fill Locations report. Use cut stakes
for verifying surveyor’s staking elevations.
Because cut stake points are markers, they do not affect the grid at all.
They simply reflect information about the grid.
6.5.2 Control Points

If you are using field mode when you input your data, you will never
need to use control points. However, if you are using relative mode
and you want to convert the project to field mode, you need to use
control points.
Control Points are two master points on your plans or in a drawing.
The control points set the northing and easting coordinates. By
pointing on the northing and easting coordinates, you are able to move
your on-screen surface to represent your plans. These points allow you
to move your plans to represent the absolute values found in the field.
When you choose to use control points, all of your coordinates will be
changed from relative to field values. You cannot change or delete
control points, so make sure you type in the coordinates and digitize
the points very carefully. We suggest you copy or archive the project
before you use control points.


This chapter has given you the basic information you need to use each
data type properly. See Chapter 7, Editing Data: Changing What
You’ve Done for step-by-step instructions on how to change what you
have done in the data screen. See Chapters 8-10 to learn about
SiteWork's reports.


CHAPTER
7
Editing Data: Changing What
You’ve Done 7
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q About changing what you’ve done
Q Editing surface data
Q Deleting data
Q Copying surfaces, drawings and projects
Q Taking good project notes
Q Changing general information
Q Changing the drawing scale
Editing Data: Changing What You’ve Done 7
7.1 Introduction
Whether you have made a mistake while digitizing or something came
across wrong during the import, you need to learn how to change and
delete what you've done. This chapter explains how to use the
information dialog boxes, change data, delete data, and copy projects,
drawings, and surfaces.
7.2 About Changing What You’ve Done

There are many reasons to change data you have digitized or imported
into SiteWork. Perhaps an error was made during digitizing. Maybe
you want to see how changing certain data affects your volumes.
Whatever your reason for changing your data, consider whether you
might want to go back to the original data at some point in the future.
Consider whether the change you are going to make is drastic enough
to where you would not want to redigitize the information if needed.
If you are experimenting with changing certain data to see how it
affects your volumes, work from a copy of your data so you always
have an original.
If having a copy of the surface(s), drawing, or project would save you
time if you had to go back to the original data, take a few minutes to
copy what you think is necessary before you begin to change any
original data.
Additionally, if you are estimating a complicated job site or if you are
trying out different scenarios, take a few minutes to keep the
information about the surfaces, drawings, and the project itself up to
date.
7.3 Editing Surface Data

Mistakes are inevitable, so Paydirt SiteWork makes it easy to edit the
data you have entered.

7.3.1 Setting up to Change

SiteWork is set up so you can change as many things as you need to
window and you set up to change, you are in change mode until you
set up to digitize, set up to delete, set up to copy, set up to screen edit,
or close out of the surface data window.
You can use the mouse edit feature to select objects with the mouse
instead of the digitizer.
To set up to change:
Click .
OR
Select Edit / Change and select the desired data type to change.
Note – If you have not digitized your reference points for this
session yet, a dialog box appears asking you to digitize in your
reference points.
7.3.2 Changing Point Data (Boreholes, Cut Stake Points, and

Elevation Points)
You can change the X, Y, and Z information about elevation points, cut
stake points, and boreholes.
To change information about your boreholes, elevation

points, or cut stake points:
1. If SiteWork is not in change mode, click .
2. Click , , or .
OR
1. Select Edit / Change.
2. Select Boreholes, Elevation Points, or Cut Stakes.

3. Digitize the point. The Change Points dialog box appears

(below).
4. If the coordinates listed in the edit boxes do not look like the
coordinates of the point you wanted to change, click Next to
select the next point.
5. To change information about the point, enter the new coordinate
values in the respective coordinate fields.
6. When you are finished making changes to the points, click OK
to save the changes, or Cancel to discard the changes.
7. To change another point, repeat steps 3-6.
8. When you are finished making changes, click Cancel then press
[Enter.]

7.3.3 Changing Points on Lines of Data (Contour Lines and

Sloping Lines)
You can change the X, Y, and Z information of points on lines of data
(contour lines or sloping lines). Changing points on lines of data
works in a fashion similar to changing data points.
To change a point on a contour or sloping line:

2. Click or .
OR
1. Select Edit / Change.
2. Select Contour Lines or Sloping Lines.
3. Digitize the point on the line you want to change. The Change
Points dialog box appears (below).
4. If the point coordinates are close but not exactly what you
expected them to be, you may have digitized a nearby point.
Click Next up to four times to see the next point. If you still
cannot find the right point, digitize a new point.
5. To change an X, Y, or Z coordinate, enter the new number in the
coordinate field.
Note – If you are changing a contour line, changing the Z
coordinate on one point changes the elevation of the entire
contour line.

6. Click OK to accept the changes.

7. Repeat steps 3-6 until you have made all the necessary changes
to your contour lines.
8. When you are finished making changes to your contour lines or
sloping lines, press [Enter].
7.3.4 Changing Sloping Areas

You can change the X, Y, and Z information about the sloping area's
elevation point, the thickness, the name or group association, and the
slope of the sloping area, and you can redigitize the elevation point of
the sloping area.
To change a sloping area:

1. If SiteWork is not in change mode, click . and click .
OR
Select Edit / Change /Sloping Areas.
2. Digitize a point on the sloping area you want to change. The
Change Sloping Area dialog box appears (see figure, next
page).
3. If the sloping area listed in the dialog box is not the correct
sloping area, click Next to see the next sloping area.
4. To rename the sloping area, enter the new name in the New
Name field.

5. To change the group name, select a new group from the Group
list.
6. To add a new group, enter the new group name in the Group
field.
7. To change the thickness of the sloping area, enter the new
thickness in the Thickness field.
8. To change information about a data point in the sloping area,
enter the new coordinate in a coordinate field for that point.
Repeat for the other coordinate(s) for that point.
9. To change the slope percent of a sloping area created with the
Slope Percent method, enter the new percentage in the Slope
field.
10. To make the outer boundary of the sloping area act as a contour
line (affecting the surrounding surface), select the Influences
Surface check box.
11. To keep subgrade adjustments from affecting the takeoff
volumes for this sloping area, select the Lock Entity check box.
12. When you are finished making changes to the sloping area,
click OK to save the changes, or Cancel to discard the changes.
13. To change another sloping area, repeat steps 3-12.
14. When you are finished making all of your changes, click Close.

7.3.5 Changing Entities (Subgrade Adjustments, Pads, and AOIs)

You can change the general information or boundary information for
subgrade adjustments, pads, and AOIs.
To change boundary information about your subgrade

adjustments, pads, or AOIs:
2. Click , , or . The Change Entity Data dialog box
appears.
OR
Select Edit / Change and select Subgrade Adjustment (Layers),
Pads, or Areas of Interest. The Change Entity Data dialog box
appears (below).
3. Select the Boundary (X and Y values) option.

4. Click OK.

5. Digitize the point you want to change on the subgrade

adjustment, pad, or AOI. The Change Entity dialog box appears
(below).
6. To rename the subgrade adjustment, pad, or AOI, enter the new

name in the Name field.
7. To change the group, select a group from the Group list.
field.
9. To change the elevation of the pad, enter the new elevation in
the Elevation field.
10. To change the thickness of the pad or subgrade adjustment,
enter the new thickness in the Thickness field.
11. When you are finished making changes to the subgrade
adjustment, pad, or AOI, click OK to save the changes, or
Cancel to discard the changes.
12. To change another boundary point on a subgrade adjustment,
pad, or AOI, click Next, and repeat steps 5-11.
If you are finished making changes to the subgrade adjustment,
pad, or AOI, press [Enter].

To change general information about your subgrade

adjustments, pads, or AOIs:
2. Click , , or .
OR
Select Edit / Change and select Subgrade Adjustment (Layers),
Pads, or Areas of Interest.
3. The Change Entity Data dialog box appears (below).
4. Select Information (Name, Thickness, etc.).

5. Click OK. The Subgrade Adjustment, Pad, or AOI Information
dialog box appears (see figure, below).

6. In the Selected Name list, select the name of your subgrade

adjustments, pad, or AOI that you want to change. To select
multiple entities, press and hold the [Ctrl] key while clicking the
names. To select a range of entities, click the first entity in the
range, press and hold the [Shift] key, then click the last entity in
the range.
7. To rename the subgrade adjustment, pad, or AOI, enter the new
name in the Name field. You will not be able to change the
names of a multiple selection.
8. To change the group, select a group from the Group list. The
chosen group will be assigned to all entities highlighted in the
list.
field. The group will be assigned to all entities highlighted in
the list.
10. To change the thickness of the pad or subgrade adjustment,
enter the new thickness in the Thickness field. This thickness
will be assigned to all entities highlighted in the Selected Name
list.
11. You can also apply a thickness adjustment to all selected
objects. Select the entities you want to change in the Selected
Name list, then use the Adjust spin wheels to the right of the
Thickness field to increment or decrement the thickness of each
selected object in feet or meters, based on the current selected
units.
12. To change the elevation of the pad, enter the new elevation in
the Elevation field. This elevation will be assigned to all objects
highlighted in the Selected Name list.
13. You can also apply an elevation adjustment to all selected
objects. Select the entities you want to change in the Selected
Name list, then use the Adjust spin wheels to the right of the
Elevation field to increment or decrement the elevation of each
selected object, based on the current selected units.

14. (Pad only) To cause the outside boundary of the pad to act as a
contour line, select the Boundary Contour at Elevation check
box.
15. (Pad only) To keep subgrade adjustments from influencing the
takeoff volume of the pad, select the Protect Entity from
Subgrade Adjustment check box.
16. (AOI only) To set the AOI to multiple surface input (formerly
called daylighting) to a surface (see Chapter 4, Digitizing Data,
page 90), select the Daylight To check box, then select a surface
to which you will daylight from the Daylight To list.
17. (AOI only) To set the AOI as an exclusion area (i.e., an area that
is not included in volume calculations), select the Exclusion
AOI check box.
18. When you are finished making changes to the subgrade
adjustment, pad, or AOI, click Save to save the changes, or
Cancel to discard the changes.
19. To change another subgrade adjustment, pad, or AOI, repeat
steps 6-16.
20. When you are finished making all of your changes, click Close.

7.4 Deleting Data

If you think you need to delete your data (and possibly redigitize it),
first consider which would be easier changing or deleting the data. If
it would be easier to change the data, see the previous section. If it
would be easier to delete then redigitize the data, use the information
in this section.
7.4.1 Setting up to Delete

SiteWork is set up so you can delete as many things as you need to
window and you set up to delete, you are in delete mode until you set
up to digitize, set up to change, set up to copy, set up to screen edit, or
close out of the surface data screen.
You can also use the Mouse Edit feature to allow you to use the mouse
to select entities for deletion.
To set up to delete:
Click .
OR
Select Edit / Delete and select the data type to delete.
Note – If you have not digitized your reference points for this session,
a dialog box appears asking you to digitize in your reference points.
7.4.2 Deleting Points (Cut Stake Points, Boreholes, and Elevation

Points)
If you make a mistake as you create cut stake points, elevation points,
or boreholes, you can delete any or all of them when you are finished
digitizing them.

To delete points:
1. If SiteWork is not in delete mode, click .
2. Click , , or . The Delete Cut Stake Points, Delete
Boreholes, or Delete Elevation Points dialog box appears.
OR
Select Edit / Delete and select Cut Stakes, Boreholes, or
Elevation Points. The Delete Cut Stake Points, Delete
Boreholes, or Delete Elevation Points dialog box appears
(below).
3. Select one of the options.

4. Click OK.
5. If you selected Single Points:
a. Digitize the point you want to delete. The Delete Point
dialog box appears (see below).
b. Make sure the point listed is the one you want to delete. (If
it isn't, click Next and repeat step a.)
c. Click OK.
Note – Once you click OK, you cannot retrieve the data.

d. To delete another point, repeat steps a-c.

OR
If you are finished, click Cancel, then press [Enter].
6. If you clicked All, a warning appears asking you if you are sure
you want to delete the objects. Click Yes.
Note – Once you click Yes, you cannot retrieve the data.

7.4.3 Deleting Lines of Data (Contour Lines and Sloping Lines)

If you make a mistake as you digitize contour lines or sloping lines,
you can delete a point along the line, delete the entire line, or delete all
the lines when you are finished digitizing them.
To delete points on contour lines or sloping lines:

2. Click or .
OR
Select Edit / Delete and select Contour Lines or Sloping Lines
The Delete Contours or Delete Sloping Lines dialog box
appears (below).
To delete all of the contour lines or sloping lines:

2. Click o or .
OR
Select Edit / Delete and select Contour Lines or Sloping Lines.

The Delete Contours or Delete Sloping Lines dialog box

appears (below).
3. Click All.
4. Click OK. A warning appears asking if you really want delete
the objects.
5. Click Yes.

7.4.4 Deleting Entities (Sloping Areas, Subgrade Adjustments,

Pads, and AOIs)
You can delete any or all of your sloping areas, subgrade adjustments,
pads, and AOIs.
To delete sloping areas, subgrade adjustments, pads, and

AOIs:
2. Click , , , or .
OR
Select Edit / Delete and select Sloping Areas, Subgrade
Adjustments (Layers), Pads, or Areas of Interest.
The Delete Sloping Areas, Delete Subgrade Adjustments, Delete
Pads, or Delete AOIs dialog box appears (below).
3. Highlight the names of the entities you want to delete.

OR
Click All to select all sloping areas, subgrade adjustments, pads
or AOIs.
4. Click OK.

7.5 Copying Surfaces, Drawings, and Projects

SiteWork makes it easy for you to build a safety net when you begin to
change what you have done. You can copy an individual surface, so
you can experiment with its data without redigitizing anything. You
can copy a drawing along with all of its surfaces, so you can
experiment with the data in a broader sense. You can copy a project,
so you can make radical changes to any part of the project without fear
of losing the time you have already invested.
7.5.1 Surface Copy

Copy lets you copy a surface to a new name. This feature copies only
the surface you select and saves it as the name you type in.
To copy a surface:
1. Select Edit / Surface / Copy.
The Copy Surface dialog box appears (below).
2. To choose a surface to copy that is other than the current

surface, select the name of the surface you want to copy from
the Surface Name list.

3. Enter the name of the new surface in the New Surface Name
field.
4. Click OK. SiteWork copies the surface and the copied surface
becomes the current surface.

7.5.2 Drawing Copy

Copy lets you copy a drawing created in SiteWork to a new name. You
can make as many estimates as necessary with the same plans. This
feature copies the drawing you select and all of its surfaces. It saves
the drawing as the name you type in. The surfaces that make up the
drawing keep their original names.
To copy a drawing:
1. Select Edit / Drawing / Copy. The Copy Drawing dialog box
appears (below).
2. To select a drawing to copy, select the name of the original

drawing from the Drawing Name list.
3. Enter the name of the new drawing in the New Drawing Name
field.
4. Click OK. The copy of the drawing becomes the active drawing.

7.5.3 Project Save As

Save As lets you copy a project to a new name. This feature copies the
project you select, all of its drawings, and all their surfaces. It saves
the project as the name you type in. The drawings that make up the
project and their surfaces keep their original names.
To copy a project:
1. Select Project / Save As. The Save As dialog box for projects
appears (below).
2. If necessary, locate the project you want to copy using the

Directories or Drives lists.
3. Highlight the name of the project in the Project Name list.
4. Enter the name of the new project in the Copy To field.
5. Click OK.

7.6 Taking Good Project Notes

Keeping good notes on your project, drawings, and surfaces helps you
remember what you need to know when you finally formulate your
bid. Good note taking becomes imperative when you have multiple
surfaces set up with different scenarios, so you can make the best
estimate possible.
The Memo button in the Surface Information, Drawing Information,
and Project Information dialog boxes lets you keep electronic project
notes. When you have a memo for a surface, drawing, or project, you
will see part of the memo in the Information dialog box.
While you can keep information about individual surfaces, drawings,
and projects, you type in the memo and use the memo window the
same no matter what kind of memo you are creating or editing. See
the next section for a discussion on the surface information, drawing
information, and project information dialog boxes.
To make or change a surface memo, drawing memo, or

project memo in the current project:
1. To work on a Surface memo:
Select Edit / Surface / Information.The Information dialog box
appears.
OR
To work on a Drawing memo:
Select Edit / Drawing / Information. The Information dialog
box appears.
OR
To work on a Project memo:
Select Project / Information The Information dialog box
appears.

2. Click Memo. The memo.txt dialog box appears (below).
3. Enter or edit your memo. (If you want to just type in your memo
and exit this window, proceed to step 8.)
4. To paste information you have copied to the clipboard, click
.

5. To copy information from this memo for use somewhere else,

click .
6. To cut information out of this memo for use somewhere else,
click .
7. To print the memo, click .
8. To save the memo, click .
9. When you are finished making or changing your memo, click
the X in the upper right corner of the dialog box.

7.7 Changing General Information

When you created your project, drawing(s), and surfaces, you typed in
information about them. You can change this information using the
Information dialog boxes.
7.7.1 Information about your Surface

Information lets you see and change information about your surface.
The data in the Surface Information dialog box comes from what you
typed in when you created or copied the surface.
To see and/or change surface information:

1. Select Edit / Surface / Information. The Information dialog box
appears (below).
2. To change the surface name, enter the new name for the surface
in the Surface Name field.
3. Select the Use Daylight AOI check box if you want this surface
to daylight to the selected daylight surface. Typically, you will
select this option for proposed or design surfaces, and clear it
for substrata surfaces.
4. To add or change the memo, click Memo. The memo screen
appears. See page 176 for details on using the memo screen.
5. Select File / Save.

6. Select File / Close.

7. Click OK when you are finished making changes or viewing the
surface information.
7.7.2 Information about your Drawing

The Drawing Information dialog box lets you change the drawing
name, the grid spacing, the drawing elevation warning limits, the
entity thickness warning limits, the memo, and the drawing scale. (Do
not change the drawing scale unless you put the wrong scale in when
you first set up the drawing.)
To see and/or change drawing information:

1. Select Edit / Drawing / Information. The Drawing Information
dialog box appears (see figure, next page).
2. If the grid space per surface is less than 100 KB, enter a smaller
value in the Grid Spacing field. For most projects, the grid
space per surface should be between 100 and 200 KB, but it can
be larger.
3. Enter the new or changed information in any of the other fields.
4. To add or change the memo, click Memo. The memo window
appears. See page 176 for details on using the memo screen.
5. To change the drawing scale, click Scale. See Changing the
Drawing Scale, page 182 for details.

C Warning – Do not change the scale if you get a different plan sheet of the
same project drawn to a different scale. SiteWork will automatically adjust
the scale for you, based on your reference points. Only change the scale if
you made a mistake when first setting up the drawing.

drawing information.
7.7.3 Information about your Project

Information lets you see and change information about your project.
The data in the Project Information dialog box comes from what you
entered when you created or copied the project.

To see and/or change project information:

1. Select Project / Information. The Project Information dialog
2. Enter the new or changed information in any field except

Project ID.
3. If you would like to include a memo about the project, click
Memo. For example, you might want a memo to explain any
changes you made to the project information.
project information.
7.8 Changing the Drawing Scale

The drawing scale tells SiteWork how to interpret the information you
entered. The drawing scale affects data calculations and printing, so
you must set the scale before you can begin digitizing or importing
data. You set up the scale when you set up the drawing. If you set the
wrong scale when you first set up the drawing and you digitized in
your data, you can change the scale to get correct volumes.

C Warning – Do not change the scale if you get a different plan sheet of the
same project drawn to a different scale. SiteWork will automatically adjust
the scale for you based on your reference points.
7.8.1 Wrong Scale: Importing

If you set the wrong scale on a drawing before you imported it, your
volumes will still be correct. However, your printouts may be smaller
or larger than you expect. Do not change the drawing scale. If you
want to adjust the print scale, simply use the Page Setup dialog box.
7.8.2 Wrong Scale: Digitizing

If you set the wrong scale on a drawing before you digitized it, your
volumes will be wrong, but your printouts will look just like your
plan. You can change the scale to correct the problem using the
Drawing Scale dialog box.

To open the Set Drawing Scale dialog box after the drawing
has been created:
1. Select Edit / Drawing / Information. The Drawing Information
dialog box appears (below).
2. Click Scale. A warning appears telling you your data will

change if you continue.
3. Click Yes. The Drawing Scale dialog box appears (see figure,
next page).

4. To use Scale Value to change the drawing scale, select the Scale
value option and enter the new scale value in the adjacent field.
OR
To use Known Distance to change the drawing scale:
a. Select the Known distance option and enter the distance
between two known points in the adjacent field. The two
points should be reasonably far apart to increase accuracy.
b. Carefully digitize the first point of the known distance.
c. Carefully digitize the second point of the known distance.
The new scale value will be displayed at the bottom of the
dialog box.
d. Click OK. You will return to the Drawing Information
dialog box.
5. Click OK. A warning appears telling you your data will be
rescaled.
6. Click OK.

This chapter has shown you how to change what you've done in
SiteWork. See Chapter 8, Using Report Windows to learn how to use
the report screen. See Chapter 9, Running the Reports for step-by-step
instructions on how to create each SiteWork report. See Chapter 10,
Using SiteWork to Your Advantage for an in-depth discussion on what

SiteWork's reports can do and which ones you should use in what
circumstances. See Chapter 11, Exporting to learn how to export your
data.

CHAPTER
8
Using Report Windows 8
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q Report window
Q Zooming
Q Refresh
Q Changing what is in the report
Q Setting up how your mesh is displayed
Q Setting up how the grid should be displayed
Q Saving your text reports
Q Copying to the clipboard
Q Managing reports
8.1 Introduction
Paydirt SiteWork displays a report window when you select a report
from the Reports menu and set the report options. SiteWork allows
you to view as many reports as you want at one time. All of the report
windows are similar, but there are differences in the View menu and
the toolbars. This chapter explains the report window layout and the
features that are common between different reports. See Chapter 9,
Running the Reports to learn how to setup and run each specific report.
See Chapter 10, Using SiteWork to Your Advantage to learn when to
use individual reports.
8.2 The Report Window
To view a report window:

1. Select Reports.
2. Choose a report option from the list. Its setup dialog box
appears.

3. Enter the report settings and click OK. The report window
appears (Figure 8.1).
Title Bar Current Project Name
Menu Bar
Active Window
Toolbar
Color Bar
Divider Bar
Status Bar
Figure 8.1 SiteWork’s Report window.
8.2.1 Report Tabs

Some reports have multiple parts. You can see other parts of the report
by clicking on a different tab.
8.2.2 The Report Window Menu Bar

Notice the menu bar is attached to the main part of the screen. The
View menu adds several items when a report window is active and lets
you adjust the way a report is presented to you. The Reports menu lets
you run another report. The Windows menu lets you control what
report is in the active window and how the report windows are

arranged on the screen. The Help menu gives you access to SiteWork's
and Windows' online help system and lets you check what version of
SiteWork you have.
What is on each menu can change depending on what report is in the
active window, but the menu titles remain the same.
8.2.3 The Report Window Toolbars

A report's toolbar gives you quick access to the most commonly-used
features in the report. To use any of the features, click the feature's
button. The toolbar is attached to its report window. You will have as
many toolbars as you have reports open. Each report's toolbar affects
only its report.
Each report toolbar and its functions are listed below.
3D View Toolbar
This toolbar gives you quick access to the following features in the 3-
D report: Open, Print, Area of Interest selection, Orientation setup,
Reset transformation, Refresh, Zoom in, Zoom out, Zoom all, About,
and Help.
Cut/Fill Locations Toolbar
This toolbar gives you quick access to the following features in the
Cut/Fill Locations Report: Open, Save, Print, Export to a Total
Station, Area of Interest selection, Cut Stake Options, Contour
Options, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom All, About, and Help.

Grid Cell Values Toolbar
Grid Cell Values report: Open, Print, Area of Interest selection,
Refresh, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom All, About, and Help.
Grid Cell Volumes Toolbar
Grid Cell Volumes report: Open, Print, Area of Interest selection,
Surface Contours Toolbar
Surface Contours report: Open, Print, Area of Interest selection,
Contour display settings, Refresh, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom All,
About, and Help.
Cross Sections Toolbar
Cross Sections report: Open, Print, Area of Interest selection, Set cross
section interval, Display previous, Display next, Mouse edit, Digitize,

Areas and Volumes Toolbar
Areas and Volumes report: Open, Save, Print, Area of Interest
selection, Refresh, About, and Help.
Site Balance Toolbar
Site Balance report: Open, Save, Print, Area of Interest selection,
Refresh, About, and Help.
Project Summary Toolbar
Project Summary report: Open, Save, Print, Refresh, and About and
Help.
Total Volumes Toolbar
Total Volumes report: Open, Save, Print, Refresh, and About and
Help.

8.2.4 The Color Bar

The color bar gives you the range of elevations for the surface(s) to
help you get a better idea of what the colors on the report represent. If
you want to make more room for the report itself, you can hide the
color bar.
To hide the color bar:

1. Press and hold your mouse button over the divider bar.
2. Drag the divider bar to the left most boundary of the report
window.
3. Release your mouse button.
To uncover the color bar:

1. Press and hold your mouse button over the left edge of the
report.
2. Drag the divider bar to the right until you see the color bar.

8.3 Zooming
Sometimes it is easier to see what is in the graphical part of a report
when you can enlarge or reduce it on your screen. SiteWork’s zoom
features let you do just that.
8.3.1 Zoom
You can select an area to enlarge on in any graphical report except the
3-D Views report.
To enlarge an area:
1. Press and hold your mouse button at a corner of the area you
want to enlarge.
2. Drag your mouse until SiteWork draws a dashed rectangle over
8.3.2 Zoom In
Zoom In enlarges the display two times (2x) its original size.
To enlarge the display of an area by two times its original

size:
1. Click .
OR

8.3.3 Zoom Out

Zoom Out reduces the display by two times (2x) its present size.
To reduce the display of an area by two times its original

size:
1. Click .
OR
8.3.4 Zoom All

Zoom All adjusts the zoom factor so you can see all of the report.
To reset the zoom factor:

1. Click .
OR
Press [Ctrl]+[A]
OR
Select View / Zoom Reset.

8.4 Refresh
Refresh erases the screen then redraws the report on the screen.
To refresh the screen:

1. Click .
OR
Press [F5].
OR
8.5 Changing What is in the Report

If you want to change what is in your report, you can open the Options
dialog box. You can change the area of interest and other options.
To select other options or a report:

1. Select View / Options. The Options dialog box appears.
2. Select your options. (See Chapter 9, Running the Reports for
details on selecting options for individual reports.)
3. Click OK.

8.6 Setting up How Your Mesh is Displayed

The 3-D Views, Cut/Fill Locations, and Surface Contours reports use a
mesh formed in the shape of the surface to display information. The
mesh discussed here is not the actual grid of the surface(s) from which
your volume calculations are based, but a representation of that grid to
display the information. You can change how this mesh is displayed
to suit your needs. The mesh can be in color or in gray scale (or in
monochrome for the 3-D report). The mesh itself can be solid, filled,
or not appear at all.
Other options (discussed later in this chapter) affect the way your
report looks. Some reports let you show or hide the data from
individual surfaces. Some reports let you generate a zero line and/or
cut stakes.
The Grid Cell Values and the Grid Cell Volumes reports do not have
these options. The options for these reports are discussed in the next
section.
8.6.1 Color vs. Gray Scale or Mesh

SiteWork's graphics reports (3-D Views, Cut/Fill Locations, Grid Cell
Values, Grid Cell Volumes, Surface Contours, and Cross Sections) can
be displayed in color. The Cut/Fill Locations and Surface Contours
reports can also be displayed in gray scale. If Gray Scale has a check
mark in front of it when you click on View in the menu bar, your mesh
will be displayed in shades of gray. Otherwise, your mesh will be
displayed in color.
The 3-D Views reports can be displayed in monochrome. If Mesh has
a check mark in front of it when you click on View in the menu bar,
your 3-D view will be displayed in monochrome.
The gray scale or mesh option can improve print quality when you are
printing out in black and white. It can also increase the speed of the
time it takes for your report to draw on the screen. Other factors, such
as how much memory your computer has and how fast your
computer's processor is affect this speed as well.

The color option is the best when you are working out the details of
your estimate and when you are using a color printer or plotter to print
out the report.
8.6.2 Color Grid, Filled Grid, or None

Once you have determined whether the report should be in color or
shades of gray, you need to decide what your mesh should look like.
You have three options: Color Grid, Filled Grid, or None.
Color Grid displays the mesh so it is like a net formed in the shape of
the data (Figure 8.2). This option speeds up the time it takes to print
out or draw the report on the screen, but the data looks more jagged
than when it is displayed using Filled.
Figure 8.2 An example of how the mesh is displayed using the Color Grid
option
Filled Grid displays the mesh so it is like a blanket or sheet formed in

the shape of the data (Figure 8.3). This option takes the longest to print
out or draw on the screen, but it makes the mesh look the most like the
actual plan or site.

Figure 8.3 An example of how the mesh is displayed using the Filled Grid
option
None displays no mesh at all (Figure 8.4).
Figure 8.4 An example of how the mesh is displayed using the None option

8.7 Setting up How the Grid Should be Displayed

The Grid Cell Values and the Grid Cell Volumes reports display the
actual grid of the surface or the result surface. The Grid Cell Volumes
report can also display fill cells only, cut cells only, neutral cells only,
or any combination of the three. (Other options affect the way your
report looks. See Chapter 9 for details.) You can change how the grid
and its cells are displayed to suit your needs.
8.7.1 Display Grid

Display Grid lets you show or hide the grid. This option works
independent of what cells (cut, fill, or neutral) are displayed.
To show or hide the grid:

Select View / Display Grid. The grid will be visible if Display Grid is
checked. Select Display Grid to toggle the check mark.
8.7.2 Cut Cells

Cut Cells displays the grid cells that have a cut value.
To show or hide the cut cells:

Select View / Cut Cells. Cut cells will be visible if Cut Cells is
checked. Select Cut Cells to toggle the check mark.

8.7.3 Fill Cells

Fill Cells displays the grid cells that have a fill value.
To show or hide the fill cells:

Select View / Fill Cells. Fill cells will be visible if Fill Cells is
checked. Select Fill Cells to toggle the check mark.
8.7.4 Net Cells

Net Cells displays the grid cells that have both cut and fill.
To show or hide the net cells:

Select View / Net Cells. Net cells will be visible if Net Cells is
checked. Select Net Cells to toggle the check mark.

8.8 Saving Your Text Reports

Save Text Report lets you save your report as tab-delimited text, Excel
spreadsheet, or Timberline Precision file. These files enable you to
import your text report data into spreadsheets and other bidding
programs to help with your estimate.
To save the report as a text file:

1. Select Reports / Save Text Report. The Save As dialog box
appears (see below).
2. Choose the file's destination directory.

3. Enter the name of the file, including the extension (e.g. park.xls,
park.TXT or park.VOL) in the File name field.
4. Choose either Text Files or Precision Files in the Save File as
Type list.
5. Click OK.

8.9 Copying to the Clipboard

Copy to Clipboard sends a copy of the report to the Clipboard in your
Windows desktop. See your Microsoft Windows User's Guide for
more information.
To copy the report in the report screen to the clipboard:

1. If you want to copy only part of the text report to the clipboard,
select the text:
a. Drag your mouse across the range of text you want to copy
to highlight it.
b. Release the mouse button.
2. Select Edit / Copy to Clipboard.
3. Open the other application and paste the image according to the
application's instructions.
8.10 Managing Reports

SiteWork's report screen lets you open as many reports at one time as
Windows will allow. The menu bar reflects the report in the active
window.
8.10.1 Running a Report in the Same Window

You can rerun the report in the same window if you want to change the
surfaces that are being calculated and you do not want to have two
windows of the report open.
To rerun the report:

1. Click . The report's setup dialog box appears.
2. Configure the report as desired. See Chapter 9, Running the
Reports for details on how to set up individual reports.

3. Click OK.
8.10.2 Opening Other Reports

Once you have a report running, you can run other reports.
To open other reports:

1. Select Reports.
2. Select the report you want to run. The report's setup dialog box
appears.
3. Configure the report as desired. See Chapter 9, Running the
Reports for details on how to set up individual reports.
4. Click OK.
8.10.3 Arranging Windows

If you have a lot of report windows in your report screen, you can
arrange them so you can more easily see the information.
To cascade the report windows:

Select Windows / Cascade. The report windows line up so you can see
all of their titles.
To tile the report windows:

Select Windows / Tile Horizontally or Windows / Tile Vertically. The
report windows will be arranged next to each other horizontally or
vertically.

8.10.4 Arranging Icons

If you have minimized your report windows and they are cluttered
across your screen, you can have your computer arrange the icons
along the bottom of your screen.
To arrange icons:
Select Windows / Arrange Icons.
8.10.5 Switching Between Windows

When you have multiple reports running you will need to switch
between them.
To make a report the active window:

Click the report's title bar.
OR
1. Select Window.
2. Select the name of the report.
8.10.6 Closing Reports

You can close one report at a time, or you can close all of the reports
you have open.
To close a report:
1. Make sure the report you want to close is the active window.
2. Click . If you have only one report running, SiteWork will
return to the Project window.
OR
Select Window / Close Current.

If you have only one report running, SiteWork will return to the Data
window unless it was closed separately. Select View / Plan data to
reopen the data window.
To close all of the reports:

Select Window / Close All. SiteWork will return to the Project window.
This also closes the data window.

This chapter has shown you how to change what you've done in
SiteWork. See Chapter 9, Running the Reports for step-by-step
instructions on how create each SiteWork report. See Chapter 10,
Using SiteWork to Your Advantage for an in-depth discussion on what
SiteWork's reports can do and which ones you should use in what
circumstances. See Chapter 11, Exporting to learn how to export your
data. See Chapter 12, Printing to learn how to print.
You may have noticed some things about the report window you want
to change. If you want to change your preferences or just learn more
about them, read Chapter 14, Customizing Paydirt SiteWork.


CHAPTER
9
Running the Reports 9
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q About SiteWork’s reports
Q The 3-D Views report
Q The Cut/Fill Locations report
Q The Grid Cell Values report
Q The Grid Cell Volumes report
Q The Surface Contours report
Q The Cross Sections report
Q The Areas and Volumes report
Q The Project Summary report
Q The Site Balance report
Q The Total Volumes report
9.1 Introduction
SiteWork’s reports give you the power of information in neat,
professional-looking packages. This chapter explains how to run each
of SiteWork’s reports and explains the report’s setup options.
9.2 About SiteWork’s Reports

SiteWork's reports provide a wealth of information about your site to
help you in the estimating process. SiteWork has ten reports: 3-D
Views, Cut/Fill Locations, Grid Cell Values, Grid Cell Volumes,
Surface Contours, Cross Sections, Areas and Volumes, Project
Summary, Site Balance, and Total Volumes.
The reports not only provide the quantity information you need, but
they also enable you to check your work. Sometimes you will need to
adjust the grid size to improve the model.
If you need an overview of the report screen basics, read Chapter 8,
Using Report Windows. If you need an in-depth discussion of what
each report can do for you, read Chapter 10, Using SiteWork to Your
Advantage.
The reports in this chapter are discussed in the same order as they
appear in the Reports menu.
When you set up a report, the report setup dialog box appears with the
Select Surface tab on top. You can set up your report by selecting your
options in that tab then clicking on OK. However, the setup dialog box
also contains option tabs. You can set most (if not all) of your report
options right from the setup dialog box. All you need to do is click on
an option tab and select the options. You can click on any tab while the
dialog box is open to make any necessary changes. When you are
finished selecting your surface(s) and setting your options, click on
OK.

You can also select or change the report options (and sometimes other
options) once you have run the report. The report options dialog box
works the same way as the report setup dialog box, but it does not
contain the Select Surface or Select Drawing tab.
If you want to read step-by-step instructions on how to set your
options for the options in the report setup dialog box or in the report
options dialog box, turn to the section on the report options.
9.3 The 3-D Views Report

3-D Views lets you see your surface model in a three-dimensional
view. You can select a single surface or a view of the difference
between two surfaces. Use this report to confirm takeoff accuracies,
present your bid, and document your estimate.

9.3.1 Setting up the Report
To see a 3-D report of your project:

1. Select Reports / 3-D Views. The 3-D Views Setup dialog box
appears with the Select Surface tab visible (below).
2. To choose your initial surface, select the Show check box and
select the name of the surface from the Initial list.
3. If you want to see a single surface rather than the difference
between two surfaces, make sure the Difference Surface check
box is cleared, then proceed to step 6.
4. If you want to see a 3-D view of the cut and fill between two
surfaces:
a. Select the Difference Surface check box.
b. Follow the procedure in step 2 to select a final surface.

5. A surface's data will be displayed over the 3-D mesh if its Show
check box is selected. (You will see things like contour lines,
sloping lines, pad boundaries, etc.) To show or hide the data for
a surface, select or clear its Show check box.
6. If desired, select your area of interest (AOI). See 3-D View
Options, below, for detailed instructions on how to select an
AOI and set other report options.
7. Click OK. The 3-D Views report appears (below).
9.3.2 3-D View Options

The 3-D Views report lets you select a different AOI or adjust the
display.

Remember, you can set however many options you want in any order
you wish by selecting a tab and setting the options. When you are
finished setting the options, click OK.
To open the report options dialog box:

Select View / Options. The 3-D Views Setup dialog box appears
(below).
B Tip – You can go straight from the report to the Areas of Interest tab by
clicking .
To set your report options:

1. Click the Areas of Interest tab in the 3-D Views dialog box.
2. This report automatically uses the AOI you selected the last
time you ran the report. If no AOI is selected, it uses the master
AOI.

To select a different AOI:

a. Click the AOI you want to select.
b. If you change your mind about selecting an AOI, click
Clear.
3. Click the Display Options tab (below).
B Tip – You can go straight from the report to the Display Options tab by
clicking .
4. To rotate the view, enter the rotation angle (-90 to 90) in the
Rotation field.
5. To incline the view, enter the new inclination angle (0 to 90) in
the Inclination field.
6. To tilt the view, enter the tilt amount (-90 to 90) in the Tilt field.
7. To exaggerate the view, enter the new exaggeration in the
Exaggeration field.
8. To set the zoom, enter the new zoom factor in the Zoom field.

9. Click OK. The 3-D Views report appears using your new
settings.
9.3.3 Reference Square

Because you can rotate your surface 360 degrees and incline it up to
89 degrees, the reference square can help you identify the position of
the surface. The reference square on the drawing corresponds to the
Reference Square in the upper right corner of the window.
To see or hide the reference square:

Select View / Reference Square.

9.3.4 Rotating the View

Rotate lets you turn your 3-D surface model to view it from different
angles.
To use rotate:
1. Select View / Mouse.
OR
Right-click on the surface model.
2. Select Rotate.
3. Press and hold your left mouse button while dragging your
mouse. The surface model rotates about its center.
9.3.5 Translating the View

Translate lets you move the entire surface model within the window,
so you can see a more detailed view of an area on the surface model.
To use translate:
OR
2. Select Translate.
mouse. The surface model moves with the mouse movement.
Use this feature with the 3-D Views Scale option to magnify your
surface, so you can focus on a particular area.

9.3.6 Scaling the View

Scale lets you increase or decrease the size of the surface model on the
fly.
To use scale:
OR
2. Select Scale.
mouse. The surface model increases or decreases in size.
Use this feature with the Translate feature.
9.3.7 Resetting the View

Reset puts the view back to what it looked like when you first ran the
report.
To reset the view:

OR
2. Select Reset.

9.4 The Cut/Fill Locations Report

The Cut/Fill Locations report compares two surfaces and displays the
cuts ad fills. Use this report when locating cuts and fills, verifying the
accuracy of your takeoff, quantifying individual cuts and fills,
determining the center of mass, and taking your cut stake information
to the field.
To see the cut/fill locations report:

1. Select Reports / Cut/Fill Locations. The Cut/Fill Locations
Setup dialog box appears (below).
2. Click the Select Surface tab. To choose your initial surface,

select the Show check box and select the name of the surface
from the Initial list.
3. To choose your final surface, select Final check box and select
the name of the surface from the Final list.

4. A surface’s data will be displayed if its Show check box is

selected. (You will see things like contour lines, sloping lines,
pad boundaries, etc.) To show or hide the data for a surface,
select its Show check box.
5. If desired, select your area of interest (AOI), set your cut stake
options, and set your contour options. See Cut/Fill Options,
page 226 for detailed instructions on how to set your report
options.
6. Click OK when you are finished setting up the report. The
Cut/Fill Locations report appears (below).
B Tip – Click the Staking Report tab at the bottom of the report window to go
to the staking section of the report.

9.4.2 Cut/Fill Map

The Cut/Fill Locations report is really four reports in one: a cut fill
map showing cut stakes, a cut fill map showing individual cut and fill
areas, a text report of cut stakes, and a text report of cut and fill areas.
To switch between the two parts of the report, click the appropriate tab
at the bottom of the report window.
In this report, cut locations and cut stakes marking cuts are marked in
shades of red. Fill locations and cut stakes marking fills are marked in
shades of blue. The zero line is marked in green. Neutral areas are
marked in shades of white. If you are using grayscale, the cut and fill
locations are in shades of gray, but the cut stakes are marked as
described above.

9.4.3 Staking Report

The Staking Report (below) lists the digitized cut stakes first then the
interval cut stakes. It lists each cut stake by point ID, lists the
coordinate of the point, and tells you the existing elevation, proposed
elevation, and the depth of cut or fill. Information in this report tab is
determined by the settings in the Cut Stakes tab.
B Tip – Click the Cut/Fill Map tab at the bottom of the report window to go to
the Cut/Fill Map.

9.4.4 Cut/Fill Areas

The Cut/Fill Areas (shown in the figure below) graphically display the
zones that require cut (in red) and the ones that require fills (in blue),
along with the center of mass for each cut/fill area. This report view
gives the contractor a general overview of the site. The center of mass
for each area allows the contractor to judge the average distance and
time between cut and fill locations.

9.4.5 Areas Report

The Cut/Fill Areas Text Report (shown below) shows information
about each specific cut or fill area larger than the minimum size you
indicated when setting up the report. The report includes area, average
and maximum depth, bank volume, shrink/swell percentage, expanded
volume, and center-of-mass locations for each cut and fill area. It also
includes cut and fill totals.
If you selected multiple AOIs, SiteWork reports information for each
AOI. If two AOIs overlap, the information for the overlapping section
is repeated in the last AOI entered. The select box lists AOIs in the
order you entered them.

9.4.6 Cut/Fill Options

The Cut/Fill Locations report lets you select a different AOI, change
your cut stake options, or change your contour options. It also lets you
determine exactly what you want to display on the graphical reports.
Remember, you can set as many options as you want, in any order you
wish. Just click on a tab. Set the options. When you are finished setting
the options, click OK.

1. Select View / Options. The Cut/Fill Locations Setup dialog box
appears (below).
clicking .

To select the areas of interest:

1. Select the Areas of Interest tab.
AOI.
a. Select the AOI you want to use.
Clear.
To select multiple AOIs:
a. Select the first AOI you want to display.
b. To select several AOIs in a row, press and hold [Shift] and
click and drag your selection.
c. To select AOIs not listed in order, press and hold [Ctrl] and
click on the AOIs you want to select.

To set cut stake options:

1. To set your cut stakes options, select the Stakes tab (below).
B Tip – You can go straight from the report to the Cut Stakes tab by clicking
.
2. To generate a zero line, make sure the Zero Line check box is
selected.
3. The cut stakes you digitized in the surface data screen will be
displayed if the Include Digitized Cut Stakes check box is
selected. To show or hide digitized cut stakes, select or clear the
Include Digitized Cut Stakes check box.

4. To generate cut stakes at a specified interval:

a. Make sure the Interval check box is selected.
b. Enter the horizontal distance you want between the cut
stakes in the Horizontal field.
c. Press [Tab] to advance to the Vertical field. Enter the
vertical distance you want between the cut stakes.
d. Press [Tab] to advance to the X field. Enter the X coordinate.
Interval cut stakes are generated for the entire AOI, but
SiteWork needs to know where to start generating them.
The initial coordinates box marks the starting point for
generating the cuts stakes. Regardless of the location of the
initial coordinate, SiteWork generates cut stakes within all
selected AOIs across the entire drawing at the specified
interval.
e. Press [Tab] to advance to the Y field. Enter the Y coordinate.
5. Each cut stake is displayed on the graphic part of the cut/fill
locations report by an X. You can also show any combination of
the following information: Stake Number, Initial Elevation,
Final Elevation, and Depth of Cut or Fill. An option will be
displayed if its check box is selected.
a. To show or hide the cut stake number, select or clear Stake
Number.
b. To show or hide the initial elevation, select or clear Initial
Elevation.
c. To show or hide the final elevation, select or clear Final
Elevation.
d. To show or hide the depth of cut or fill, select or clear
Depth of Cut.

To set contour options:

1. To set your contour options, select the Contours tab (below).
B Tip – You can go straight from the report to the Contour Options tab by
clicking .
2. To set the range of the contours you want displayed:

a. Enter the elevation of the lowest contour you want
displayed in the Start At field.
b. Enter the elevation of the highest contour you want
displayed in the Stop After field.

3. To show contours based on an interval between them:

a. Select the Interval option.
b. Enter the distance between the contours in the Contour
Spacing field. For example, if you want an elevation
change of 5 feet between the displayed contours, enter 5.
4. To show a specific number of contours on the screen:
a. Select the Quantity option.
b. Enter the number of contours in the # of Contours field.
For example, if you want 10 contour levels displayed on
the report, enter 10.
5. To make the contour lines easier to see, you can bold and/or
label certain contours:
a. To bold certain contours, enter the interval between bold
contours in the Bold Every field. For example, if you want
every third contour bold, enter 3.
b. To label certain contours, enter the interval between
labeled contours in the Label Every field. For example, if
you want every fifth contour labeled, enter 5.

To set cut/fill areas options:

1. To set the Cut/Fill Areas options, select the Areas tab (below).
2. You can determine what displays on the graphical reports by

selecting the On Cut Graphic and On Fill Graphic check boxes
adjacent to the options you want to display.
3. Similarly, you can determine which data appears in the text
report by selecting the In Text Report check boxes adjacent to
the options you want to display.
4. To set the Cut Swell percentage, enter the percentage you want
to use in the Cut field.
5. To set the Fill Shrink percentage, enter the percentage you want
to use in the Fill field.
6. Enter in the Minimum Area to Report field the minimum area, in
square feet/meters, that you want reported. Any areas smaller
than this minimum will be totalled together and reported as
miscellaneous cut/fill zones.

7. Select the Show Zero Line check box if you want the zero line
(the line of zero change between cut and fill areas) to display.
Cut/Fill Locations report appears with the new settings.

9.5 The Grid Cell Values Report

The Grid Values report tells you the elevation at each intersection of
the grid for a surface. The surface’s data can be displayed over the
grid lines for reference. Use this report to double-check the accuracy
of your data.
To see the grid cell values report:

1. Select Reports / Grid Cell Values. The Grid Cell Values Setup
3. A surface’s data will be displayed over the grid if its Show
check box is selected. (You will see things like contour lines,
sloping lines, pad boundaries, etc.) To hide the data for a
surface, clear the Show check box.

4. If desired, select your area of interest (AOI). See Grid Cell

Values Report Options, page 237 for detailed instructions on
how to select an AOI.
5. Click OK when you are finished setting up the report. The Grid
Cell Values report appears (below).
As you can see in the figure above, you may not be able to see the
values when you first run the report. If you want to see the values on
the screen, zoom in on the report (see the figure on the next page).

Sometimes, you may have so much data or your font may be so large
that you will not be able to see the values on the screen no matter how
much you zoom in. However, you will be able to see the values on
your printouts and on the print preview. Before you print out, use the
print preview to determine whether the selected output scale will allow
you to see your data. If it will not, go to Page Setup and decrease the
output scale number. See Chapter 8, Using Report Windows for
instructions on how to change the output scale number. See
Chapter 12, Printing for instructions on how to do a print preview.

9.5.2 Grid Cell Values Report Options

The Grid Cell Values report lets you select a different AOI.

Select View / Options. The Grid Cell Values Setup dialog box
appears (below).

1. Click the Areas of Interest tab.
click .
AOI.


Clear.
3. Click OK when you are finished making changes. The Grid Cell
Values report appears using the selected AOI.

9.6 The Grid Cell Volumes Report

The Grid Cell Volumes report compares two surfaces to calculate
volumes for each cell. It also reports the volumes of cut and fill at
each intersection of the grid for the surfaces. The surfaces' data can be
displayed over the grid lines for reference. Use this report to settle
disputes to show how calculations were done, to prove your volumes,
or to find out specific information about volumes for each grid cell.
To see the grid cell volumes report:

1. Select Reports / Grid Cell Volumes. The Grid Cell Volumes
3. To choose your final surface, select the Show check box and
select the name of the surface from the Final list.


pad boundaries, etc.) If you are finished setting up your report,
go to step 6.
5. If desired, select your area of interest (AOI). See Grid Cell
Volumes Report Options, page 242 for detailed instructions on
how to select an AOI.
6. Click OK when you are finished setting up the report. The Grid
Cell Volumes Report appears (below).
As you can see, you may not be able to see the volumes when you first
run the report. If you want to see the volumes on the screen, use the
Zoom In command (see the figure on the next page).

Sometimes, you may have so much data or your font may be so large
that you will not be able to see the volumes on the screen no matter
how much you enlarge it. However, you will be able to see the
volumes on your printouts and on the print preview. Before you print,
use Print Preview to determine whether the selected output scale is
appropriate. If not, use Page Setup and decrease the output scale value.
See Chapter 8, Using Report Windows for instructions on how to
change the output scale number. See Chapter 12, Printing for
instructions on how to use Print Preview.

9.6.2 Grid Cell Volumes Report Options

The Grid Cell Volumes report lets you select a different AOI.

Select View / Options. The Grid Cell Volumes Setup dialog box
appears.

clicking .
AOI.


Clear.
3. Click OK when you are finished making changes. The Grid Cell
Volumes report appears using the selected AOI.

9.7 The Surface Contours Report

The Surface Contours report displays a plan view contour map of a
surface. The contours are created from grid cell intersections of the
selected surface. Use this report when your plans have mostly spot
elevations and you want to generate a contour map or when you are
error checking and you want to find bad elevations.
To see the surface contour report:

1. Select Reports / Surface Contours. The Surface Contours Setup
2. On the Select Surface tab, choose your initial surface by

selecting the surface in the Initial list.
3. If desired, select your area of interest (AOI) and set your
contour options. See Surface Contours Options, page 245 for
detailed instructions on how to set your report options.


Surface Contours report appears (below).
9.7.2 Surface Contours Options

The Surface Contours report lets you select a different AOI and
Change your contour options.
you wish. Just select a tab, set the options, and when you are finished
setting the options, click OK.

Select View / Options. The Surface Contours Setup dialog box
appears.


clicking .
AOI.
Clear.

3. To set your contour options, select the Contours tab. (below).

B Tip – You can go straight from the report to the Contours tab by clicking
.
4. To set the range of the contours you want displayed:

a. Enter the elevation of the lowest contour you want
displayed in the Start At field.
b. Enter the elevation of the highest contour you want
displayed in the Stop After field.

5. To make the contour lines easier to see, you can bold and/or
label certain contours:
a. To bold certain contours, enter the interval between bold
contours in the Bold Every field. For example, if you want
every third contour bold, enter 3.
b. To label certain contours, enter the interval between
labeled contours in the Label Every field. For example, if
you want every fifth contour labeled, enter 5.
6. To show contours based on an interval between them:
a. Select the Interval option.
b. Enter the distance between the contours in the Contour
Spacing field. For example, if you want a height change of
5 feet between the displayed contours, enter 5.
7. To show a specific number of contours on the screen:
a. Select the Quantity option.
b. Enter the number of contours in the # of Contours field.
For example, if you want 10 contours displayed on the
report, enter 10.
8. To reset all the information in the Contours tab, click Reset.
Surface Contours report appears with the new settings.

9.8 The Cross Sections Report

The Cross Sections report lets you visually compare as many surfaces
as you need. You can divide the site and view cross sections to check
for errors or see where the cuts and fills are located.
To see the cross sections report:

1. Select Reports / Cross Sections. The Cross Sections Setup
2. A surface will appear in the report if its check box is selected.

To remove a surface from the report, clear its check box.
3. To select a different line style for a surface, click on the line
style adjacent to the surface, and select a new line style from the
list.

4. To select a different color for a surface, click on the Color field

adjacent to the surface, and select a new color.
5. To select a different point style for the data points for a surface,
click on the Point Style field adjacent to the surface, and select a
new style.
pad boundaries, etc.) To show or hide the data for a surface,
select or clear its Show check box.
7. If desired, select your area of interest (AOI) and set your
interval options. See Cross Sections Options, page 252 for
detailed instructions on how to set your report options.
8. Click OK. The Cross Sections report appears (below).
The cross section displayed in the bottom part of the report window is
highlighted in plan view in the top part of the window. The arrow
along the highlight shows the orientation of the cross section.

The numbers along the left side of the cross section show the elevation
range. The number above the cross section lists the station number of
the cross section. The numbers below the cross section list the length
of the cross section and the total distance from one side of the AOI to
the other. Digitized across sections are listed as D1, D2, D3, etc.
9.8.2 Cross Sections Options

The Cross Sections report lets you select a different AOI and change
your interval options.
you wish by selecting a tab and setting the options. When you are
finished setting the options, click OK.

Select View / Options. The Cross Sections Setup dialog box appears.

1. Select the Areas of Interest tab (see the figure on the next page).

Tip – You can go straight from the report to the Areas of Interest tab by
clicking .
AOI.
Clear.
3. To set your interval options, select the Interval tab. (see the
figure on the next page).

Tip – You can go straight from the report to the Interval tab by clicking
.
4. Select either the Horizontal or Vertical option.

5. Enter the distance between the cross sections in the Value field.
6. Click OK. The Cross Sections report appears using the new
options.

9.8.3 Digitizing Cross Sections

You can digitize a cross section following whatever you want to
examine (such as a road or building).
To digitize a cross section:

1. Click on the plan view part of the report.
2. Click .
OR
Click , then click to digitize a multiple-point cross
section using the mouse.
3. If you have not digitized anything in the Surface Data screen,
digitize reference point #1, then digitize reference point #2.
4. Digitize the cross section.
5. Press [Enter].
6. To digitize another cross section, repeat steps 4 and 5.
OR
To stop digitizing cross sections, press [Esc].
Note – If you are digitizing a cross section and you press [Esc]
before you press [Enter], the cross section you are digitizing will
be deleted.
9.8.4 Viewing Individual Cross Sections

The red marker on the plan view part of the report highlights the cross
section shown at the bottom of the screen. The marker has an arrow
showing the direction the cross section is drawn.
Next lets you see the next cross section.

To see the next cross section:

Click . The marker moves to the right or up on the plan
view of the report and the graph updates to show the new cross
section.
OR
Select View / Next Section. The marker moves to the right or up
on the plan view of the report and the graph updates to show the
new cross section.
Previous lets you see the previous cross section.
To see the previous cross section:

Click . The marker moves to the left or down on the plan
view of the report and the graph updates to show the new cross
section.
OR
Select View / Previous Section. The marker moves to the left or
down on the plan view of the report and the graph updates to
show the new cross section.
9.8.5 Deleting Digitized Cross Sections

In the Cross Sections report, you can delete all of your digitized cross
sections or only the selected one.
To delete all the digitized cross sections:

Select Edit / Delete All Digitized.
To delete one digitized cross section:

1. Click on the digitized cross section you want to delete. It will
turn red.
2. Right-click on the plan view part of the screen.

3. Select Delete Digitized Section.
9.9 The Areas and Volumes Report

The Areas and Volumes report displays the area and volume in each
enclosed entity (subgrade adjustments, sloping areas, and pads) for a
single surface in tabular and/or graphical form. Use the Areas and
Volumes report to quickly find the area of things like buildings and
parking lots. This report always reports the digitize area of an entity
and never clips the area to an AOI.

To see the areas and volumes report:

1. Select Reports / Areas and Volumes. The Areas and Volumes
2. To choose your initial surface, select the name of the surface

from the Initial list.
3. If desired, select your area of interest (AOI) and set your display
options. See Areas and Volumes Options, page 260 for detailed
instructions on how to set your report options.

4. Click OK when you are finished setting up the report. The Areas
and Volumes report appears (below).
B Tip – Select the Areas and Volumes tab at the bottom of the report
window to go to te text part of the report.
The Areas and Volumes report is really two reports in one: a map of
your enclosed entities and a text report of the selected entities’ areas
and volumes. To switch between the two parts of the report, select the
appropriate tab at the bottom of the report window (see the figure on
the next page).

This part of the report lists each enclosed entity type that you included
in the report then lists each individual item of that entity type. It gives
you the thickness of the entity, its area, and its volume.
B Tip – Click the View Entities tab at the bottom of the report window to view
the map section of the report.
9.9.2 Areas and Volumes Options

The Areas and Volumes report lets you change your areas and volumes
options.

Select View / Options. The Areas and Volumes Setup dialog box
appears.


1. Click the Areas of Interest tab (below).
AOI.
a. Click on the AOI you want to select.
b. If you change your mind about selecting an AOI, click on
Clear.
3. To set your display options, click the Display Options tab.
4. You can include subgrade adjustments, pads, and/or sloping
areas in this report. An entity will be included if it is highlighted
in the list.

To select or deselect an entity, click it.

To include all of the entities in the list click Select All. The
button changes to Clear All when the entities are selected
To include none of the entities in the list, click Clear All. The
button changes to Select All.
5. Click OK when you are finished making changes. The Areas
and Volumes report appears using the options you selected.

9.10 The Project Summary Report

The Project Summary Report is actually three reports in one. In the
Material Summary section, you can see areas and volumes for all of
your enclosed entities. You can also see the elevation, thickness,
boundary, and conversion factor information. In the Enclosed Area
section, you can see exactly how your shrink and swell factors affect
the dirt volumes. In the Project Summary section, you can see a
summary of the total figures for the project.

You can select as many drawings as you want included in the report.
You can choose the initial and final surfaces for each drawing. You
can select a different AOI for each drawing. You can set the shrink
and swell percentages for each drawing.
To see the project summary report:

1. Select Reports / Project Summary. The Project Summary Setup
dialog box appears (see the figure on the next page).
2. To select or deselect a drawing, select or clear its check box.
3. To choose a different initial surface, select the surface you want
to use in the Initial Surface list.
4. To choose a different final surface, select the surface you want
to use in the Final Surface list.
5. To choose a different AOI, select the AOI you want to use in the
drawing's AOI list.

6. To change the cut swell percent, enter the new percentage value
in the Swell% field.
7. To change the fill shrink percent, enter the new percentage value
in the Shrink% field.
8. If desired, set your display options. See Project Summary
Options, page 267 for detailed instructions on how to set your
report options.
Project Summary report appears.

The Material Summary part of this report groups the information by

drawing, then by group. It gives you the information for each item in
the group then gives you a total for the group for each category. At the
bottom of this part of the report is a list of the group totals.
The Project Summary report is really three reports in one. To switch
between the parts of the report, click the appropriate tab at the bottom
of the report window (see the figures on the next page).
The enclosed area cut/fill tab reports the excavation of cut and fill
from Existing after strip to Proposed subgrade. If subgrade
adjustments, pads, or sloping areas have been copied, then some
information is reported more than once. For example, office building
and office building base represent the same boundary on the site. The
excavation volumes are reported twice. Use this report to see what
excavation volumes are for a particular area of the site. Do not add the
totals together. Use the Total Volumes or the Summary page for the
overall excavation volumes of the project.

The Summary Page of this report gives you the material group totals
for the selected drawings and the excavation totals for the selected
AOIs for each drawing.

9.10.2 Project Summary Options

The Project Summary report lets you change your display options.

1. Select View / Options. The Project Summary Setup dialog box
appears (below).

1. Click the Display Options tab.
2. The top part of this tab gives you options as to what you want
included in the Material Summary part of the Project Summary
report. An item will be included if its check box is selected.
3. The bottom part of this tab lets you choose the units the data
should be displayed in. To select a unit, select its check box.
4. Click OK when you are finished making changes. The Project
Summary report appears using the options you selected.

9.11 The Site Balance Report

The Site Balance report shows you the volumes you will need to
balance the site. It compares two surfaces and calculates the volumes
necessary to balance the cuts and fills.
To run the site balance report:

1. Select Reports / Site Balance. The Site Balance Setup dialog
2. To choose your initial surface, select the surface you want to use
in the Initial list.
3. To choose your final surface, select the surface you want to use
in the Final list.
4. If desired, select your area of interest (AOI) and your site
balance options. See Site Balance Options, page 270 for
detailed instructions on how to select an AOI and set other
report options.

5. Click OK. The Site Balance report appears (below).
The Site Balance report lists each iteration of calculations as it

calculates your balanced surface, so you can use a different
number as you determine the best numbers to use to balance the
site. It also lists your balance options for your reference.

9.11.1 Site Balance Options

The Site Balance report lets you select a different AOI and change
your site balance options.
you wish. Just click on a tab. Set the options. When you are finished
setting the options, click OK.

Select View / Options. The Site Balance Setup dialog box appears.

1. Click the Areas of Interest tab (below).
clicking .

AOI.
a. Click on the AOI you want to select.
Clear. Click on the AOI you want to select.
3. To set your site balance options, click the Balance Options tab.
(below).

4. This report automatically uses the site balance options you

selected the last time you ran the report.
The Adjust Final Surface method calculates the volumes you
would need to raise or lower the entire surface of the site by a
certain depth. For example, if you want to see how your
volumes change if you raise the site by 2 feet (meters), click
Adjust Final Surface and type 2 into the edit box.
The Balance to Value method calculates the volumes you would
need to balance the site to a certain amount of cut or fill yards.
For example, if you want to make sure you have 1000 cubic
yards (cubic meters) of export, click Balance to Value and type
1000 into the edit box. If you want to import 1000 cubic yards
(cubic meters) of dirt, click Balance to Value and type -1000
into the edit box.
The method you select in Balance Options determines what is
calculated in the report.
5. Select a method option.
For Adjust Final Surface, enter a number representing how
much you want to raise or lower the site.
For Balance To Value, enter a number representing the cut/fill
number to which you want the site balanced.
6. You can allow for cut dirt swelling and fill dirt shrinking:
a. To set the cut/swell percent, enter the cut/swell percent in
the Cut field.
b. To set the fill shrink percent, enter the fill/shrink percent in
the Fill field.
Note – If the material you are cutting shrinks instead of swells
or the material your are filling swells instead of shrinks, enter a
negative number.

7. You can lock pads and/or sloping areas. Locking an entity keeps
it at the input elevation while the elevation of the area around it
changes to balance the site. An entity is locked if it is
highlighted.
To lock or unlock an entity, select or clear it.
To lock all of the entities in the list, click Select All. The button
changes to Clear All.
To unlock all of the entities in the list, click Clear All. The
button changes to Select All.
8. Click OK when you are finished making changes. The Site
Balance report appears using the options you selected.

9.11.2 Creating a Balanced Surface

Once you have run the site balance report and have found the volumes
that suit your needs, you can create a new surface using the figures
calculated in the report. You can use the new surface just as you
would use any other SiteWork surface. For example, if you find that
raising the entire site by 1.75 feet would balance the site so you would
not have dirt left over, you could create a new surface based on the
report. You could then use the surface when you run other reports.
To create a balanced surface:

1. Select Edit / Create Surface for Site Balance. The Add dialog
2. Enter in the name of the new surface in the Surface Name field.
3. Click OK.
Note – A balance surface that uses a daylight AOI will not
perfectly balance because the boundary with a daylight AOI is
tied to another surface. This effect cannot be calculated until a
new surface is created.

9.12 The Total Volumes Report

The Total Volumes report compares two surfaces for each drawing you
select and gives you a tabular summary of your cut and fill volumes.
Use this report to get your total volumes for the site or for a specific
AOI.
To see the Total Volumes report:

1. Select Reports / Total Volumes. The Total Volumes Setup dialog
2. A drawing is included in the report if its check box selected.

3. To choose a different initial surface, select the surface you want
to use in the Initial Surface list.
4. To choose a different final surface, select the surface you want
to use in the Final Surface list.
5. To select a different AOI, click on the drawing’s AOI pull-down
list box, and click on the AOI you want to select.

6. To change the cut swell percent, enter the new percentage value
in the Swell% field.
7. To change the fill shrink percent, enter the new percentage value
in the Shrink% field.
8. Click OK when you are finished setting up the report. The Areas
and Volumes report appears (below).

The Excavation Volume section reports total compacted volumes and

adjusted volumes.
The Excavation Area section reports the total Area of Cut and Fill for
each reported AOI. If AOIs overlap, the Area of Cut or Fill may be
duplicated.
The removal quantities section reports the area and volume for any
subgrade adjustment on the initial surface, clipped to the master AOI
or the single selected AOI.

This chapter has given you step-by-step instructions on how to create
each SiteWork report. See Chapter 10, Using SiteWork to Your
Advantage for an in-depth discussion on when to use each of the
reports. See Chapter 11, Exporting to learn how to export your data.
See Chapter 12, Printing to learn how to print.


CHAPTER
10
Using SiteWork to Your
Advantage 10
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q About SiteWork’s reports
Q The 3-D Views report
Q The Cut/Fill Locations report
Q The Grid Cell Values report
Q The Grid Cell Volumes report
Q The Surface Contours report
Q The Cross Sections report
Q The Areas and Volumes report
Q The Project Summary report
Q The Site Balance report
Q The Total Volumes report
Using SiteWork to Your Advantage 10
10.1 Introduction
SiteWork’s reports give you the power of information in neat,
professional-looking packages. This chapter explains how to use
SiteWork’s reports to your advantage.
10.2 About SiteWork’s Reports

SiteWork has ten reports that present SiteWork's calculations in
various ways. SiteWork's reports can help you:
• Verify takeoff accuracies
• Prepare your bid
• Take data to the field
• Support your opinions as you work on the job
This section gives you a brief overview of what reports work well in
different situations. The following sections give you detailed
information about how to use each report to your fullest advantage.
10.2.1 Reports to Use When you Need to Verify Takeoff

Accuracies
Finding errors in your data can be tedious work, but SiteWork’s
reports can make error checking much easier for you. To verify takeoff
accuracies, use: 3-D Views, Cut/Fill Locations, Grid Values, Grid
Volumes, Surface Contours, Cross Sections, and Areas and Volumes
reports.
10.2.2 Reports to Use When Preparing Your Bid

When preparing your bid, use SiteWork’s reports to back up your
figures and your final bid. When preparing your bid, use: 3-D Views,
Surface Contours, Cross Sections, Project Summary, Cut/Fill
Locations, Grid Values, Grid Volumes, and Site Balance reports.

10.2.3 Reports to Send Information to the Field

Once you have the job, use the Cut/Fill Locations, Project Summary,
and Total Volumes report to help you prepare the site for moving dirt.
10.2.4 Reports to Use When Arguing a Point

Once you are into a job, you may find that your crews are coming up
short or long on dirt. What do you do? Use these reports to present
the problem: Project Summary, Grid Values, and Grid Volumes.
10.3 The 3-D Views Report

The 3-D Views report displays a 3-dimensional picture of a surface or
the difference between two surfaces. Include a 3-D Views report when
discussing individual surfaces for your bid or trying to show the
physical cuts and fills for the site.
Use This Report To:

D Verify Takeoff Accuracies
D Prepare Your Bid
Improve Client Presentations
Send Information to the Field
Argue a Point or Back up Your Bid

10.3.1 Using 3-D Views to Verify Takeoff Accuracies

The 3-D Views report is ideally suited for verifying your takeoff
accuracies. You can quickly verify your digitizing, because any
omissions or mistakes should be easy to spot. The existing 3-D view
should look just like what you would see if you looked at the subgrade
elevations of the site. The proposed 3-D view should look just like
what you would see once the dirt has been moved. This report lets you
see spikes in the data that might be difficult to spot in plan view. The
difference between two surfaces option gives you a 3-D view of the
cuts and fills on the site.
First look at each surface individually. You should be able to see
spikes in the data fairly easily. You can exaggerate the way the picture
is drawn to more clearly see any problems with the data. You can
manually or incrementally alter the viewing angles as needed.
Next, look at a 3-D picture of the difference between the surfaces to
see where the cuts and fills are on the site. You should be able to see
where the cuts and fills are and compare the 3-D difference with what
you have envisioned for the site. Note any areas that seem to have too
much cut or too much fill.
Set up the 3-D display where you can most easily find problems in the
data. The picture can be a single-color picture or it can be accented
with a range of colors. You can view the entire site or you can view a
single area of interest. You can zoom in on an area or view the entire
site.
10.3.2 Using 3-D Views to Prepare Your Bid

The 3-D Views report can be an impressive part of your bid
preparation. The report shows your customers that you have the
professional tools to make a very accurate bid, which is the first step in
completing a job in a professional manner. You can print this report in
shades of gray or in color depending on the kind of printer you have.
Either way this report helps you show your customer that you know
what you are doing and you deserve his or her business.

10.4 The Cut/Fill Locations Report

The Cut/Fill Locations report is a versatile report that displays a color-
coded map of the site that shows the locations of all the cuts, fills, and
non-grading areas. Include a Cut/Fill Locations report when you are
discussing cut and fill areas for your bid, and as you are working on
the job to set cut stakes or determine haul routes.
Use This Report To:

D Prepare Your Bid
D Improve Client Presentations
D Send Information to the Field
D Argue a Point or Back up Your Bid
10.4.1 Using Cut/Fill Locations to Verify Takeoff Accuracies

Use the Cut/Fill Locations report to verify the accuracy of your takeoff
by comparing the cut and fill areas in the report to what you see on the
plans. To see a better distinction between cut areas and fill areas,
generate a zero line.
Look at the elevation bar to make sure the cuts and fills are within the
expected range. Look at cuts and fills on the site to make sure they are
where they are expected to be. Check them against the plans. Use the
mouse and status bar to see elevations in specific areas.
You can further verify the accuracy of your takeoff by examining the
cut and fill contour lines in this report. This feature is ideal when you
use a pen plotter to print out this report. Examine contours by specific

areas of interest. Display the contour lines in a way that makes error
checking easier for you. For example, display the cut/fill contour lines
across the site at your designated interval.
If any of this information doesn't match up with what you think it
should be, use the surface data window to check the elevations of input
data and to correct any errors.
10.4.2 Using Cut/Fill Locations to Prepare Your Bid

The Cut/Fill Locations report gives the feel of reality to your bid by
graphically showing the cuts and fills on the site. The site owner can
see exactly how you plan to do the job. If the site owner has a question
as to why certain areas are cuts and why certain areas are fills, you can
use the facts from this report and your own experience to explain why
you need to do the job in this manner.
As a matter of presentation, you can display certain contour lines to
accent the Cut/Fill map without the clutter of displaying all of the
contour lines you would see if you printed the surface data screen.
You can print this report in shades of gray or in color depending on the
kind of printer you have. You can also include the staking report
which lists each cut stake and all the information about the cut stake.
However you print the Cut/Fill Locations report, this report lends
credibility to your bid.
Use the Cut/Fill Areas graphic and text tabs to discover the area,
volume, center of mass, location, average and maximum depth of
individual cuts and fills. Multiple AOIs can be selected when running
this report and the individual cuts and fills will be reported within each
selected AOI. If AOIs overlap each other, then the quantities for the
overlapping sections will be reported with the last AOI entered. This
information is a great tool for determining haul distances and
production rates for a project. You can use multiple AOIs to try
different scenarios for dirt movement to find the most efficient paths.

10.4.3 Using Cut/Fill Locations to Take Information to the Field

It can help you figure out how to plan the work by showing you your
deepest cuts and fills. Use it with the project summary report when
you need to see more exact quantities (below).
Once you have the job, you can use the Cut/Fill Locations report to
help you prepare the site for moving dirt. You can use the Export
feature and a total station to transfer information to the site. You can
export the following information from this report: elevation points,
boreholes, contour lines, sloping lines, digitized cut stakes with or
without elevation, the zero line, and the generated cut stakes.
Use this feature to compare your data with the surveyors' data and to
get your crews set up to work.
10.5 The Grid Cell Values Report

The Grid Values report displays the elevations of every grid cell
intersection for a surface. It provides an audit trail of the grid used for
calculations.

Use This Report To:

Prepare Your Bid
10.5.1 Using Grid Cell Values to Verify Takeoff Accuracies

If you find an area (through other reports) that looks suspicious but
you are not sure exactly where the problem may be, you can use the
Grid Values report to pinpoint the trouble spots.
The Grid Cell Values report gives you the elevation at every grid cell
intersection. For example, let's say you are not sure why an area of
your site is listed as a cut on your Cut/Fill Locations report. You can
run the Grid Values report for each of the surfaces you used in your
Cut/Fill Locations report and zoom in on the questionable area in each
report. You should be able to tell by the listed elevations if there is a
problem.
You can overlay the surface data onto the grid to better orient yourself
to the task and to see what data is causing the surface model to look
the way it does. Once you have found the problem, correct it in the
surface data screen.

10.5.2 Using Grid Cell Values to Argue a Point

The Grid Cell Values report is the report to use when you need to
argue a point. It gives you exact grid elevations for every grid cell on
the site. You can run a Grid Cell Values report for the surfaces in
question and compare the surfaces grid cell to grid cell to calculate
what you need to calculate. For example, you can compare an existing
grid cell to the same proposed grid cell to manually calculate the cut
and fill then check the spot on the plans.
10.6 The Grid Cell Volumes Report

The Grid Volumes report displays the volumes of every grid cell.
Use This Report To:

D Prepare Your Bid
10.6.1 Using Grid Cell Volumes to Verify Takeoff Accuracies

If you find an area (through other reports) that looks suspicious but
you are not sure exactly where the problem may be, you can use the
Grid Cell Volumes reports to pinpoint the trouble spots.
The Grid Cell Volumes report gives you the cut and fill information for
each grid cell. Let's say you found a problem in the Cut/Fill Locations
report, but you need to look at the problem at the grid cell level. You

can run the Grid Cell Volumes report using the surfaces you used in
your Cut/Fill Locations report and zoom in on the questionable area in
the report. You should be able to see exactly where the problem lies.
You can overlay the surface data onto the grid to better orient yourself
to the task and to see what data is causing the surface model to look
the way it does. Once you have found the problem, correct it in the
surface data screen.
10.6.2 Using Grid Cell Volumes to Argue a Point

The Grid Cell Volumes report is an effective report to use when you
need to argue a point. It gives you exact grid volumes for every grid
cell on the site. If you had to hand calculate some of the volumes to
argue your point, your numbers should match what you see in the Grid
Cell Volumes report.

10.7 The Surface Contours Report

The Surface Contours report displays a plan view picture of the
surface's contours. This report is especially helpful when your
digitized data consists mostly of spot elevations. You can display as
many or as few contours as will help you.
Use This Report To:

D Prepare Your Bid
10.7.1 Using Surface Contours to Verify Takeoff Accuracies

The Surface Contours report is excellent for taking a very close look at
the elevations of the site without the clutter of other data types on the
surface. It can help you visualize the site better from plan view.
10.7.2 Using Surface Contours to Prepare Your Bid

The Surface Contours report is excellent to include with your bid. You
can use it to simplify the contour information, so you can present it in
a professional manner. You can print this report in shades of gray or in
color depending on the kind of printer you have and how you want to
present the report.

10.8 The Cross Sections Report

The Cross Sections report displays cross sections of the site. A cross
section is a view of the data from the side rather than from plan view
or from a 3-D view. It is the only report where you can compare more
than 2 surfaces at a time: you can see as many surfaces as desired.
Use This Report To:

D Prepare Your Bid
10.8.1 Using Cross Sections to Verify Takeoff Accuracies

The Cross Sections report lets you see how surfaces compare to each
other including substrata surfaces. Use the report to make sure the
surfaces meet where they are supposed to meet, to make sure each
surface looks the way you expect it to look, and to compare surfaces.
If a surface does not look the way it should look in cross section, you
may have inputted an elevation wrong. If you see a cut area where you
expect to see fill, use the Cut/Fill locations report to gather more
information, then correct the problem in the surface data screen.
You can digitize a cross section for a more exact account of a specific
area on the site. For example, you can digitize a cross section along a
road segment in the plans to see a cross section of the road segment.

10.8.2 Using Cross Sections to Prepare Your Bid

The Cross Sections report adds a different perspective to what will
happen on the job site. Sometimes using cross sections rather than
plan view makes it easier to visualize certain aspects of the site. You
can graphically show the surfaces and how they interact. You can
show the customer what areas of the site will require more extensive
excavation and what areas will require less due to the material
thicknesses of the surfaces.
10.9 The Areas and Volumes Report

The Areas and Volumes report displays the area and volume of each
enclosed entity (subgrade adjustments, sloping areas, and pads) for a
single surface in text and/or graphical form. This report always reports
the areas and volumes for an entity as digitized. The data is never
clipped to an AOI. Use this report to quickly find the area of enclosed
entities such as buildings and parking lots.
Use This Report To:

D Prepare Your Bid

10.9.1 Using Areas and Volumes to Verify Takeoff Accuracies

Use the Areas and Volumes report to confirm your inputted data. This
report displays a picture of the data and text telling you the areas and
volumes of your entities. You can choose the entities (subgrade
adjustments, pads, and sloping areas) you want included in the report.
Let's say you know one of the buildings on your site is 40 feet by 60
feet. That's 2,400 square feet. You can check the area calculation for
that building to make sure it lists the correct number.
Note – If you digitized your data, the numbers listed for the areas may
not be exactly what you expect, but they should be close.
10.9.2 Using Areas and Volumes to Prepare Your Bid

The Areas and Volumes report can add strength to your bid package
because it presents the detailed information needed to clarify your bid.
If a customer requires it, you can itemize your bid using the Areas and
Volumes report. This report gives you volumes for materials that you
may need to bid.

10.10 The Project Summary Report

The Project Summary Report is actually three reports in one. The
Material Summary tab gives you boundary, area, material volume, and
excavation information for all subgrade adjustments, pads, and sloping
areas on a drawing or for an entire project. The Enclosed Area Cut and
Fill tab gives you the cut and fill volumes for all of your enclosed
entities. The Summary Page tab gives you the summary totals of the
other two parts of the report.
Use This Report To:

Verify Takeoff Accuracies
D Prepare Your Bid
10.10.1 Using Project Summary to Prepare Your Bid

The Project Summary report gives you a very detailed account of your
material quantities and excavation volumes. The Summary Page tab
lets you see the square area and volumes on one page. Essentially, any
quantity your client may need to know about your bid will be included
in this report. Material areas and volumes are clipped to the selected
AOI so this report can be used for job phase quantities.

10.10.2 Using Project Summary to Send Information to the Field

Because the Project Summary report gives you all the material
quantities, you can use it in the field when determining how much of
what material you will need to complete the job. Use this report with
the Cut/Fill Locations report to get a plan view image of the quantities
detailed in this report.
10.11The Site Balance Report

The Site Balance report shows you what it would take to balance the
dirt on the site. Use this report to show a customer how you can save
him or her money by accepting your bid.
Use This Report To:

D Prepare Your Bid

10.11.1 Using Site Balance to Prepare Your Bid

Sometimes being able to balance the site can give you the edge you
need to win a bid. You can balance the site to a value of 0 import or
export. You can also allow for a specific amount of import or export.
You can also raise or lower the final surface by tenths o feet and
compare cut and fill volumes. Once you have determined the proper
method nd adjustments for balancing the site, you can create a new
surface that reflects the new proposed excavations. The new surface
will be created in your data screen. You can use this balanced surface
in any of your reports.
Note – When using Daylight AOIs, surfaces created using Site balance
will not produce exactly as reported in the Site Balance report. This is
because the balance is based on adjusting the entire site including at
the AOI boundary.
10.12 The Total Volumes Report

The Total Volumes report compares two surfaces for each drawing you
select and reports your cut and fill volumes. Use this report to get your
total volumes for an individual drawing and for the entire project.
Use This Report To:

D Prepare Your Bid

10.12.1 Using Total Volumes

This report gives you the cut and fill volumes and the import or export
amount. It can factor in the shrink and swell percents and display
volumes for multiple AOIs. It can provide cut and fill information for
specific areas of the site which is excellent when you are working on
the site in phases.
This report provides cut and fill volumes and expanded cut and fill
volumes. It also provides the removal quantities for topsoil striping or
other materials that need to be removed from the site.
The report also provides the total area of cut and fill for each reported
AOI.
10.13Moving on in SiteWork
This chapter explains what reports you should use in different
situations and how to use SiteWork to your advantage. See Chapter 9,
Running the Reports for step-by-step instructions on how to use each
of the reports. See Chapter 11, Exporting for step-by-step instructions
on how to export data. See Chapter 12, Printing to learn how to print
reports and the surface data window. See Chapter 13, Working with
Paydirt SiteWork Projects to learn how to manage your projects.


CHAPTER
11
Exporting 11
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q About exporting in SiteWork
Q Exporting
Exporting 11
11.1 Introduction
SiteWork can export many file types for total stations so you can use
your SiteWork files in the field. It can even directly transfer some file
types to some total stations. This chapter explains how to export your
SiteWork files.
11.2 About Exporting in SiteWork

You can transfer data between SiteWork and CAD, text, and total
station survey files. You can even upload and/or download data
directly between SiteWork and the Constructor, Geodimeter, or
Geodat.
11.2.1 Advantages to Exporting

Exporting data gives you the advantages of working with CAD-based
systems and taking your data to the field. If you work out a better way
to balance a site through SiteWork, you can export the file to a CAD-
based format, so the engineer who drew up the plans can work with
your file. Once you have a proposed surface, you can export your cut
stake information for the workers in the field.
11.2.2 Surfaces and Exporting

You can export from the data screen in any surface. You need to have
the surface you want to export open when you export. If you want to
export a second surface, make sure you switch to that surface before
you start exporting. You can also export cut stake information from
the Cut/Fill report.

11 Exporting
11.2.3 Coordinates and Exporting

When you export, SiteWork uses whatever coordinate system you
have set up. If you used relative mode rather than field mode, you
should convert the coordinates to field mode using control points
before you export, so your SiteWork coordinates will match the
coordinates in the field. (See Chapter 4, Digitizing Data for more
information on Field mode.)
11.2.4 What Information is Exported?

In SiteWork, you choose what information is exported. You have the
following options: elevation points, boreholes, contour lines, sloping
lines, digitized cut stakes without elevations, generated zero line,
digitized cut stakes with elevations, and generated cut stakes. You
know your business best, so you decide what you need or don't need to
export.
11.3 Exporting
You can Export your surface data or your cut/fill data to a file for use
in another program.
You can export any of the following file types:
AutoCAD DXF (*.dxf)
Constructor (*.are)
GDX Format (*.gdx)
Generic Text (*.txt)
Geodat (*.are)
Geodimeter (*.are)
Lietz SDR2 (*.ltz)
Pentax DR1 (*.ptx)
Wild (*.wld)

Exporting 11
Note – This list of file types was complete at the time this manual was
printed. However, your SiteWork may be able to export other file
types, because we are continually improving this product. All the file
types SiteWork is able to export are listed in the Files of Type drop-
down list box in the first export dialog box.
11.3.1 Exporting to Terramodel

You can export your plan data and cut/fill report information into
Terramodel (all data types except for sloping areas). Each SiteWork
surface that you select to export is assigned to a separate layer in
Terramodel. As with the other export features of SiteWork, you can
also select the specific data types to export.
For all daylight AOIs created in Terramodel, SiteWork creates a 2D set
on the AOI layer, and a 3D set with elevations on each surface that
uses the Daylight AOI boundary.
To export site data to Terramodel:

1. With the Plan Data window or with the Cut/Fill Report window
active, select Tools / Export / To Terramodel. The Surface
selection dialog box appears:
2. Select each surface that you want to export

11 Exporting
OR
Click All to export all surfaces.
To deselect a surface, click it again.
3. Click OK. The Export Data Options dialog box appears.
Select the checkbox next to each data type or generated data

that you want to export.
4. If you want SiteWork to close automatically after the export has
finished, select Close SiteWork after Export.
5. Click OK to perform the export. Terramodel automatically
starts, opens a project and displays the exported data in the
graphics area. (If you don't want to export anything at this time,
click Cancel and you will return to the SiteWork window.)

Exporting 11
11.3.2 Exporting to a Device
Before you export to a total station:

and the device.
To export to a file:
1. Select Tools / Export / File.
2. A series of dialog boxes will appear. Answer the questions in
each dialog box. If you need more help, click Help in the dialog
box.
11.3.3 Sending to a Device

You can save time by using SiteWork's Export Total Station feature to
upload cut stake points to your device. This feature is available only
in the Cut Stake report and you must generate cut stakes before you
can export the cut stake points.
If you are using the GTCO WTMouse Emulator and NOT the LCS
GTCO Wintab driver, the GTCO Wintab Enabled option allows you
to turn off the wintab driver. This lets SiteWork upload to or download
from the Constructor when you have only one COM (serial) port on
your computer. If you have more than one COM port or if you use a
different Wintab driver, this menu option should ALWAYS have a
check mark in front of it. This option does not work with LCS Wintab
drivers which are the preferred drivers.

11 Exporting
PCMCIA Serial Port: An additional serial port can be added to most

laptop computers by using a PCMCIA serial port card. This type of
card will enable you to connect the digitizer to one serial port and the
survey device to another serial port, eliminating the conflict with the
wintab driver.
Note – We recommend the LCS Wintab driver for most users because it
has proven to be more stable, but if you only have one serial port you
may need to use the older GTCO driver. The LCS driver version 1.17
has the ability to release the serial port, but does not work on all
machines. Contact technical support for more help when you only
have one serial port.
To communicate with the Constructor when you have only

one COM port and you are using the GTCO Wintab driver:
1. Select Tools / Options.
2. Clear the check from GTCO Wintab Enabled.
3. Disconnect your digitizer from your COM port.
4. Connect your Constructor to your COM port.
5. Import or export your data.
Before you export to a total station:

and the device.

Exporting 11
To upload cut stake points:

1. Select Tools / Export / Total Station. The Export Available
Selections dialog box appears (below).
2. Select the name of the device from which you want to import.
3. To check your serial properties:
a. Click Properties. The Serial Properties dialog box
appears (below).
b. Select the correct serial properties.

c. Click OK.

11 Exporting
4. Click OK. The Export Data Options dialog box appears

(below).
5. Data will be sent if its check box is selected. Clear the check
box if you don’t want the data to be sent.
6. Click OK. The Send dialog box appears (see figure, next page).
7. Enter the new name in the Area Name field.
8. To see and/or edit the raw data in the area or job, click Edit. The
Edit dialog box appears (see figure, next page).
9. Use the information in the Project, Operator, Date, and Time
fields to verify you have the correct information. When you are
finished viewing and/or editing the file, click Close.

Exporting 11
10. Click Send.

11 Exporting
To use the digitizer:

1. Disconnect your Constructor from your COM port.
2. Reconnect your digitizer to your COM port.
3. Select Tools / Options / GTCO Wintab Enabled.

Exporting 11
11.3.4 Exporting to a File

You can save time by using SiteWork’s Export File feature to export
data to a file. This feature is available in the Cut Stake report and in
the Surface Data screen.
To export:
1. Select Tools / Export / File. The Export dialog box appears
(below).
2. Enter the name of the file (including its extension) to which you
want to export in the File Name field.
3. Click OK. The Export Data Options dialog box appears (see
figure, next page).
4. This dialog box lets you mark what items you want to export.
An item will be exported if its check box is selected. Clear the
check box to deselect an item.
5. Click OK.
If you are exporting any type of file except *.TXT, your data
will be exported to the file you specified.

11 Exporting
If you are exporting a *.TXT file, the Export Generic Text

Files dialog box appears (see figure, next page).
6. Select a delimiter option to tell the program how to separate
information in the file.
7. Click OK. Your data will be exported to the file you specified.

Exporting 11

This chapter has given you step-by-step instructions on how to export
data from SiteWork. See Chapter 12, Printing to learn how to print
Paydirt SiteWork Projects for step-by-step instructions on how to
manage your projects. See Chapter 14, Customizing Paydirt SiteWork
to learn how to change your preferences. See Chapter 15, Math Tools
to learn how to use Math Tools, SiteWork’s quick count, and length
calculator.

11 Exporting

CHAPTER
12
Printing 12
Q Introduction
Q Printing in SiteWork
Q Printing a surface’s data
Q Printing reports
Q Print preview
Q Changing the font
Q Print setup
Printing 12
12.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to print your SiteWork data window and
reports
12.2 Printing in SiteWork

SiteWork can print to any printer or plotter that works in Windows.
You can see a print preview, change the print setup, and change the
report setup.
12.2.1 Print Summary

You can print the Surface Data window or any report window.
To print:
1. Click .
OR
Select Project /Print. The Print dialog box appears.
2. Set your options.
3. Click OK.
12.3 Printing a Surface’s Data

You can print the data from one surface at a time.
To print the data in the surface data screen:

1. Click .
OR
Select Project / Print.

12 Printing
If you have magnified a portion of the display area, SiteWork

will ask whether you want to print the entire window or just the
magnified section.
The Print dialog box appears (below).
2. Scale lets you scale the report to fit on the paper the way you
want it to. Scale does not affect volumes. To change the
printing scale:
a. Click Scale. The Report Scale dialog box appears (below).
b. To make sure the entire report is printed on one page, select

Fit to Page.
c. To manually set a new printing scale, enter the new scale in
the Scale field.
d. Click OK.

Printing 12
3. Set the print range.

All prints every page.
Pages lets you enter the page numbers and letters you want to
print. For example, if you want to print pages 1-12 d, you would
enter d in the horizontal edit boxes and 1-12 in the vertical
boxes.
Select lets you choose what pages to print and what pages not to
print. Use this option when you want to print some (but not all)
pages within a range.
4. If you chose Select, select the pages you want to print. The
graphic in print dialog box shows the available pages. The pages
that will print are dark gray. The pages that will not print are
white. To select a page to print or not print, click on it.
Note – If the print job is greater than the display window,
“Report is too large for selection” will appear on the screen
and you will have to use Pages or All.
5. Click OK.

12 Printing
12.4 Printing Reports

SiteWork gives you many options when you want to print your reports.
You can fit the report on one page or have it span multiple pages, you
can include a title block or not include a title block, you can adjust the
margins, adjust the company information, and do a print preview.
Before you print, think about how you want your report to print. You
can either use the defaults or customize how your reports print.
12.4.1 Report Setup Defaults

When you first install SiteWork, it has default settings for printing. If
you like the defaults, you can skip setting up the report and go straight
to printing. The factory defaults are:
• The default left margin is 1¼”.
• The default top, bottom, and right margins are ¼”.
• All reports except the Cross Sections report will fit on one
printed page.
• The Cross Sections report defaults to the maximum number of
cross sections that will fit on one page.
• The title block and scale will be printed on the bottom of the last
printed page.
• The company information is what you set up when you installed
SiteWork.
• The date will be printed using your computer’s default format.
12.4.2 Changing the Report Setup

You can change the report setup defaults for all the reports at one time
or you can change them for each individual report. If you want to
change the defaults for all the reports, see Chapter 14, Customizing
Paydirt SiteWork. The following instructions describe how to change
the defaults for an individual report.

Printing 12
To change how a report is configured:

1. Make sure the report you want to reconfigure is running and is
in the active window.
2. Select Project / Page Setup. The report’s setup dialog box
appears (below).
Margins
To change the margins, enter a new margin value (in decimal format)
in the field of the margin you want to change (Left, Right, Top,
Bottom). For example, enter 1.25 for a margin of 1 ¼.
Note – Depending on the report you are running, the options
described may or may not be available.
Scale
To set an output scale so the report spans multiple pages:
1. Clear the Fit to Page check box.
2. Enter a new output scale in the Output Scale field.
3. To change the report printout from Output Scale to Fit to Page,
select Fit to Page.

12 Printing
Title Block
To print only the scale bar and not the title block, select the Show
Scale Bar check box and clear the Show Title Block check box.
To prevent the scale bar and title block from printing, clear the Show
Scale Bar and Show Title Block check boxes.
Select Printer
To select a different printer, Click Printers. The Printer Setup dialog
box appears. See your printer’s documentation and the Windows
documentation to learn how to change printers.
To change the printer’s properties, click Properties. Your printer’s
Properties dialog box appears. See your printer’s documentation and
the Windows documentation to learn about your printer property
options.
Date
To change the way the date is formatted in your title block:
1. Click Date. The Date Format dialog box appears (below).
2. If you want the date to print, clear the Do Not Display the Date
check box.
3. To choose a format for the date, select it from the Formats list.
4. Click OK.

Printing 12
Company Information
To change the company information:
1. Select the Company Info tab (see the figure below).
2. To change any of the information that appears on the report's
title block, enter the new information in the appropriate field.
3. When you are finished making changes, click OK.
4. When you are finished changing the report setup, click OK.

12 Printing
12.4.3 Printing Reports

To print, click . The report will print without bringing up the Print
dialog box.
To print a report:
1. If you are printing the Cross Sections report, select the part of
the report you want to print (plan view or cross sections).
If you are printing a tabbed report, select the tab for the report
you want to print.
2. Click . The Print dialog box appears.
OR
Select Project / Print. The Print dialog box appears (below).
If a graphic report is enlarged, you will be asked whether you
want to print the entire report.
3. Select your print options.

4. Click OK. If you are printing any report except the Cross
Sections report, the report will print.

Printing 12
Printing Cross Sections

5. If you are printing cross sections in the cross sections report, the
Cross Section Print Setup dialog box appears (below).
Choose the cross sections you want to print. Each station

number represents an interval cross section. Each section
labeled with a D- prefix represents a digitized cross section. A
cross section is selected if it is highlighted. To select or deselect
a cross section, click on the cross section once. To select
multiple cross sections, press the [Ctrl] key while you click on
each station. To select all the cross sections, click Select All.

12 Printing
6. Select how you want the cross sections to print.

To fit multiple cross sections on a page, click Multiples Per
Page. This option will print as many cross sections on a page as
will fit. To print fewer than the maximum on the page, enter a
smaller number in one of the Multiples Per Page fields.
To print the cross sections to a specified scale, click Scale. This
option will print as many cross sections as will fit on a page at
the specified scale. To set a different scale, enter new scale
value in the Scale field.
7. Click OK.

Printing 12
12.4.4 Print Preview

Print Preview draws each page of the report on the screen so you can
see what the report will look like before you actually print it. A print
preview takes less time to create than the printed report. It gives you
the opportunity to adjust the output scale, margins, title block display
options, etc., before you invest time and paper in an actual printout.
To see a print preview:

1. Select Project / Print Preview. The Print Preview screen appears
(below).
You can view each printed page with the print preview screen.
You can also view one or two pages at a time. You can enlarge
an area of the page then zoom out again. You can print directly
from the print preview or return to the report to edit it.

12 Printing
To use the print preview screen:

1. To view two pages at one time, click Two Page. The two-page
display appears, and the button label changes to One Page.
2. To view only one page at a time, click One Page.
3. To view the next page in the printed report, click Next Page.
4. To view the previous page in the printed report, click Prev
Page.
5. To quickly move through the printed report, click the scroll bar.
6. To enlarge an area:
a. Click Zoom In. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass.
b. Click on the area you want to enlarge.
7. To zoom out, click Zoom Out.
8. To return to the report if you decide not to print it, click Close.
9. To print the report
a. Click Print. The Print dialog box appears (see the figure on
the next page).
b. Select your print options.
c. Click OK to print the report.

Printing 12
12.4.5 Changing the Font

You can select any font you have on your computer when you are
printing out a report. You can choose the font (typeface), font style,
and type size for your printouts.

12 Printing
To change the font for a surface print.

1. Select Project / Print. The Print dialog box appears (below).
2. Click Font. The Font dialog box appears.

Printing 12
To change the font for a report print.

1. Select Project / Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog box appears
(below).
2. Click Fonts. The Font dialog box appears (below).
3. Select a font, font style, or size from the respective list.

4. When you are finished making your selections, click OK.

12 Printing
12.5 Print Setup

If you use only one printer, you should have to set it up in SiteWork
only once. However if you want to use a different printer or if you
want to change the way the printer is set up, use the Print Setup
command. Because every printer is different, the following
instructions explain only how to get to the Print Setup dialog box.
Read the documentation that comes with your printer and with
Windows to learn more about the Print Setup feature.
To select a printer for a surface data print:

1. Select Project / Print Setup. The Print Setup dialog box appears.
OR
Select Project /Print. The Surface Data Print dialog box
appears. Click Printer. The Print Setup dialog box appears
(below).

Printing 12
2. Select a printer from the Name list.

3. Make other desired changes.
4. Click Properties to change default settings for the selected
printer.
5. Click OK.
To select a printer for a report print:

1. Select Project / Print. The Print dialog box appears.
2. Make the necessary changes.
3. Click OK.
The following options allow you to select the destination

printer and its connection:
Printer
Select the printer you want to use. Choose the default Windows
printer; or select one of the currently installed printers shown in the
list. Install printers and configure ports using the Windows Control
Panel.
Orientation
Choose Portrait or Landscape.
Paper Size
Select the size of paper on which the document is to be printed.
Paper Source
Some printers offer multiple trays for different paper sources. Specify
the tray here.
Options
Displays a dialog box where you can make additional choices about
printing, specific to the type of printer you have selected.

12 Printing

This chapter has given you step-by-step instructions on how to print
Paydirt SiteWork Projects for step-by-step instructions on how to
manage your projects. See Chapter 14, Customizing Paydirt SiteWork
to learn how to change your preferences. See Chapter 15, Math Tools
to learn how to use Math Tools, SiteWork’s quick count, area, and
length calculator.

CHAPTER
13
Working with Paydirt SiteWork
Projects 13
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q How to manage your projects
Q Creating new surfaces and drawings
Q Switching between parts of your project
Q Deleting unwanted files
Q Archiving and restoring your projects
Working with Paydirt SiteWork Projects 13
13.1 Introduction
Once you’ve learned how to take care of your data, you should learn
how to manage your project, so you can use SiteWork efficiently. This
chapter explains how to create and switch between surfaces, create and
switch between drawings, archive and restore projects, and delete
projects, drawings, and surfaces.
13.2 How to Manage Your Projects

Managing your projects does not have to be a complicated process.
SiteWork sets up your directories for you, so unless you have
manually moved them, you don't have to worry about finding projects.
When you create a project, SiteWork creates two surfaces for you:
initial and final. If you want to add other elements to your volume
calculations, you can create other surfaces.
Once you have created all the surfaces you need for a drawing, you
can create other drawings that include their own surfaces.
When you are finished with a project, you should take some time to
clean up your files. You should delete surfaces, drawings, and projects
that you will never use again. You should archive projects that you
may need to reference in the future.
13.3 Creating New Surfaces and Drawings

You can create new surfaces and drawings for any project.
13.3.1 Adding a Surface

Add Surface lets you create a new surface. Since AOIs are part of the
drawing and not a specific surface, you will see the AOIs on the newly
added surface. If you create a new surface in the Site Balance report,
the final surface in the report will be converted according to the
options you set up in the report.

To add a surface:
1. Select Edit / Surface.
2. Click Add. The Add Surface dialog box appears (below).
3. Enter the name of the new surface in the Surface Name field.
4. If you want this surface to be projected to the daylight surface,
select the Use Daylight AOI check box. Substrata surfaces
typically should not use daylight AOIs.
5. Click OK. You can now work with this surface as you have been
able to do with any other surface.
13.3.2 Add a Drawing

Add Drawing creates a new drawing for the current project. The
Drawing New dialog box automatically appears after you click OK
from the Project New dialog box.
To add a drawing:
1. Select Edit / Drawing.
2. Click Add. The Add Drawing dialog box appears (see figure,
next page).
3. Enter the name of the new drawing in the Drawing Name field.

4. Grid spacing defaults to 10 ft/m. To change the grid spacing,

enter the new spacing in the Grid Spacing field.
5. Drawing Elevations defaults to -1000 ft/m to 1500 ft/m. To

change the Drawing Elevations values:
a. Enter a minimum elevation value in the Minimum field.
b. Enter a maximum elevation value in the Maximum field.
6. Entity Thickness defaults to -10 ft/m and 10 ft/m. To change the
Entity Thickness values:
a. Enter a minimum elevation value in the Minimum field.
b. Enter a maximum elevation value in the Maximum field.

7. Click OK when you are finished setting your new drawing

options. The Drawing Scale dialog box appears (below).
8. You can set the drawing scale using the scale value from your
plans or using a known distance.
To use Scale Value to set the drawing scale:
a. Select the Scale value option.
b. Enter the drawing scale in the adjacent field.
To use Known Distance to set the drawing scale:
a. Select the Known Distance option.
b. Enter the distance between two known points in the
adjacent field. The two points should be reasonably far
apart (at least 3 in/7.7 cm) to increase accuracy.
c. Carefully digitize the first point of the known distance.
d. Carefully digitize the second point of the known distance.
The new scale value will be listed at the bottom of the Set
Drawing Scale dialog box.
9. Click OK.

13.4 Switching Between Parts of Your Project

You can open only one project at a time. You can open only one
drawing at a time. You can open only one surface at a time. In other
words, if you have two drawings in your project, you can open a
surface for one drawing, but you can only open a surface for the other
drawing after you have closed the first drawing.
13.4.1 Open Surface

Surface Open lets you select a surface to work with.
To open a surface:
1. Select Edit / Surface.
OR
Click while the data window is active.
2. Click Open. The Surface Open dialog box appears (below).
3. Select the name of the surface you want to open from the
Surface Name list.
4. Click OK. The surface becomes the current surface. If you are in
the Project window, the data screen for that surface
automatically opens.

13.4.2 Open Drawing

Open lets you open or select an existing drawing from the current
project, so you can work on it.
To open an existing drawing:

2. Click Open. The Open dialog box appears (below).
3. Select the name of the drawing you want to open from the
Drawing list.
4. Click OK. The drawing will be opened, the drawing's name will
be displayed on the title bar, and the Surface Data screen will
open.

13.5 Deleting Unwanted Files

When you are finished with a project, you should delete files that you
will not need for future reference. However, you should not try to
delete them using Windows Explorer, Windows File Manager, or
DOS. SiteWork uses an index where it keeps track of every project,
drawing, and surface you create and delete. If you use some other
application to delete your surfaces, drawings, and/or projects, the
index will not get updated, and you may get error messages when you
try to open a project, drawing, or surface.
13.5.1 Delete Surface

Delete lets you remove old or useless surfaces from your directories.
Note – Use only this option to delete surfaces. If you use the Windows
Explorer or some other means to delete a surface, SiteWork will not
know you have deleted the surface and you may get error messages
later.
To delete surfaces:
1. Select Edit /Surface.
2. Click Delete. The Surface Delete dialog box appears (see the
3. Select each of the surfaces you want to delete. The name(s) will
be highlighted.
4. If you decide to keep one of the surfaces you have selected,
click on the highlighted name.
5. Click OK.
C Warning – Once you click OK, ALL the information for each highlighted
surface will be lost.

13.5.2 Delete Drawing

Delete Drawing lets you remove old or useless drawings from your
directories.
Note – Use only this option to delete drawings. If you use the Windows
Explorer or some other means to delete a drawing, SiteWork will not
know you have deleted the drawing and you may get error messages
later.
To delete drawings:
2. Click Delete. The Drawing Delete dialog box appears (see the
3. Select each of the drawings you want to delete. The name(s)
will be highlighted.
4. If you decide to keep one of the drawings you have select, click
on the highlighted name to deselect it.

5. Click OK.
drawing will be lost.
13.5.3 Delete Project

Delete Project lets you remove old or useless projects from your
directories. If you want more space on your hard drive but you do not
want to delete the project, you can archive it.
Note – Use only Delete Project to delete projects. If you use the
Windows Explorer or some other means to delete a project, SiteWork
will not know you have deleted the project and you may get error
messages later.

To delete projects:
1. Select Project / Delete. The Project Delete dialog box appears
(below).
2. If necessary, locate the name of the project(s) you want to delete

using the Directories and Drives lists.
3. Select each of the projects you want to delete. The name(s) will
be highlighted.
4. If you decide to keep one of the projects you have selected,
click on the highlighted name.
5. Click OK.
project will be lost.

13.6 Archiving and Restoring Your Projects

Any file you put on your computer takes up some of your disk space.
SiteWork can shrink the size of your project files so you can store
them on a floppy disk or just decrease the amount of hard disk space
your files take up.
When you need to use the project again, you can restore it to its
working size.
13.6.1 Archive
Archive lets you compress and store SiteWork projects you are not
currently using on a floppy disk or on a hard drive.
You can also use the Archive feature to back up your SiteWork
projects. Consider how many work hours you use SiteWork each
week. Think about what could happen to your work if something
happened to your SiteWork data (e.g. fire, virus, etc.). You can use
SiteWork's Archive feature as very cheap insurance against losing
your data. Simply archive your current project(s) onto a floppy disk
before you go home in the evening and take it home with you.
To access your archived projects, use Project Restore.
To archive a project:
1. Select Project / Archive. The Project Archive dialog box appears
(see figure, next page).
2. If necessary, locate the name of the project(s) you want to
archive using the Directories and Drives lists.
3. Select the name of the project you want to archive from the
Project Name list.

4. Enter the path to where the archived file should go in the

Archive Destination field.
OR
5. Click OK. Each archived project will have the .ZIP extension.

13.6.2 Restore
Restore returns an archived project to your working directory.
To Restore a project:
1. Select Project / Restore. The Project Restore dialog box appears
(below).
2. If necessary, locate the name of the project(s) you want to

restore using the Directories and Drives lists.
3. Enter the name of the project you want to restore in the Archive
Name list.

4. Enter the path to where the restored file should go in the Project
Destination field.
OR
5. Click OK. The project will be restored.

This chapter has given you step-by-step instructions on how to manage
your SiteWork projects. See Chapter 14, Customizing Paydirt
SiteWork to learn how to change your preferences. See Chapter 15,
Math Tools to learn how to use Math Tools, SiteWork's quick count,
area, and length calculator.

CHAPTER
14
Customizing Paydirt SiteWork 14
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q How to customize SiteWork
Q Setting your defaults
Q Setting up your digitizer
Q Project settings
Q Choosing what to show or hide
Q Group conversion factors
14.1 Introduction
SiteWork can be customized to suit your needs. This chapter explains
how to set defaults for your drawing information, surface names,
report setup, warning messages, coordinate system, grid smoothing,
and units. It explains how to show or hide your tool bar, status bar, and
each of your data types. It also explains how to edit your conversion
factors.
14.2 How to Customize SiteWork

You can customize SiteWork by setting default information in the
Project screen and by choosing what to show and hide in the Surface
Data screen. When you change the defaults, you are changing them for
all your projects whether your defaults were different when you
created the project or not. When you create a new project, you will be
working with whatever defaults are set for SiteWork at the time.
14.3 Setting Your Defaults
14.3.1 Default Drawing Information

Default Drawing Info lets you change the default grid spacing,
min/max elevations, and entity thicknesses. This option will not affect
the drawings you have already created.

To change the default drawing information:

1. Select Tools / Options / Drawing Info Defaults. The Default
Drawing Information dialog box appears (below).
2. To change the default grid spacing, enter the new grid spacing
value in the Grid Spacing field.
3. To change the Drawing Elevations defaults:
a. Enter the minimum elevation value in the Minimum field.
b. Enter the maximum elevation value in the Maximum field
4. To change the Entity Thickness defaults:
a. Enter the minimum thickness value in the Minimum field.
b. Enter the maximum thickness value in the Maximum field
5. Click OK when you are finished changing your defaults for your
drawings.
14.3.2 Default Surface Names

Default Surface Names lets you change the names of your default
initial and final surfaces. This option will not affect the names of the
surfaces in a drawing you have already created.

To change the default surface names:

1. Select Tools / Options / Surface Names Defaults. The Default
Surface Names dialog box appears (below).
2. To change a default surface name, enter the new default name in

an surface name field. By default, the initial surface is the
Daylight To surface.
3. If you want the Proposed surface to project and daylight to the
Existing surface by default, select the Daylight final surface by
default check box.
14.3.3 Report Setup

Report Setup lets you choose the default margins, printer, font
(typeface), font style, type size, date format, and company information
for your reports and their title blocks.

To set the report defaults:

1. Select Tools / Options / Report Setup Defaults. The Report
2. To change the default margins for printing the reports, enter the
new margin in a margin field (Left, Right, Top, Bottom).
3. To change the printer setup:
a. Click Printers. The Print Setup dialog box appears.
b. Make any necessary changes. See the documentation that
came with your printer and Windows for more information.
c. Click OK.
4. To change the font:

a. Click Font. The Font dialog box appears (below).
b. Choose a font, font style, or size from the respective list.

c. Click OK.

5. To change the format of the date:

a. Click Date. The Date Format dialog box appears (below).
b. Select a different date format from the Format list.

c. The date will not appear in your title blocks if Do not
display the date is selected. To have the date appear in the
report title block, clear the Do not display the date check
box.
d. Click OK.
6. To change the company information, enter the new company
information on the Company Info tab (see the figure on the next
page).
7. To learn how to change the Show Options, see Show Options,
Colors, and Line Styles, page 359.

14.3.4 Show Options, Colors, and Line Styles

You can select your show options (whether or not you see a data type,
its value, name, and group) and the colors and line styles for your data
types all in one dialog box.
The Show Options tab lets you choose what you want to see in your
report screens and your Surface Data screen.
• You can change the color and styles for data types even if the
output report is not set to display them.
• Changes made in the report screen affect only the reports and
are not reflected in the Surface Data Window.
• Changes made through Preferences/Report Setup affect the
Surface Data screen and the defaults for any drawing for which
reports have not been run. It will not change the settings for
drawings where reports have already been run.

To change what you want to see on the current report:

Setup dialog box appears.
2. Select the Show Options tab (below).
To change the default data type options for new drawings.

Select Tools / Options / Report Setup Defaults. The Report Setup
To use the show options tab

1. To select or deselect an option, select or clear its check box.
2. To choose a different color, line style, or point type, select your
choice from the respective list.
3. Click OK when you are finished setting your options.

14.4 Setting Up Your Digitizer

You can use the Digitizer Settings command to launch a digitizer setup
utility that allows you to set the Paydirt mapping for your 16-button
cursor, customize the digitizer stream filter settings and test the
communication with the digitizer.
To run the Digitizer Settings command:

Select Tools / Options / Digitizer Settings. Select Tools / Options /
Digitizer Settings. The Digitizer Setup dialog box appears (below).

14.4.1 Remapping Cursor Buttons

Using the Digitizer Setup dialog box, you can change the functions of
the individual buttons on your digitizer cursor. You can also store the
changes in an external digitizer configuration (.DIG) file that you can
import into other project files. Three external digitizer configuration
files are included with the SiteWork software: Trimble, Spectra and
GTCO (see below). Select the cursor configuration that most closely
matches your digitizer cursor.
To select a cursor configuration:

1. From the Digitizer Setup dialog box, select File / Open
OR
Click .
2. Choose a digitizer configuration from the list in the Open dialog
box (if necessary, click the file folder icon beside Look in and
navigate to the directory that contains the digitizer configuration
(.DIG) files) and click Open.
To set the digitize button:

In the Digitizer Setup dialog box, select the button you want to
assign as the new digitize button from the Digitize button list.
Note – Setting a button such as Tab as the digitize button allows
you to digitize using Tab, and also tab through fields in a dialog
box.
To remap individual cursor buttons:

1. To change a button’s function:
a. Click the button you want to change on the digitizer cursor
graphic.
b. Select the value you want to assign to the button in the Map
to list.
2. When you are finished remapping your cursor, click OK.
14.4.2 Configuring Stream Filter Settings

Often when you stream in data with your digitizer you can easily store
a very large number of points. You can avoid creating large project
files by using a filter to control the number of points that are stored.
You can access the filter parameters from the Digitizer Settings
command. To set your filter parameters:

1. From the Digitizer Setup dialog box, select File / Filter Settings
OR
Click . The Filter Settings dialog box appears (below).
2. Select Use the radial or “circle” filter to have SiteWork place

an imaginary circle at the location of the first point you digitize
using a radius defined in the Radius field. Any points digitized
within the limits of the circle are discarded. The first point
digitized outside of the circle’s limits is used as the new center
of the circle. Subsequent digitized points inside the new circle
are discarded, a new radius point is digitized outside the circle
limits and the process is continued.
3. Select Use the pipe or “box” filter to have SiteWork place the
center of an imaginary rectangle at the location of the first point
you digitize. The direction of the box is oriented toward the
second digitized point. The size of the box is determined by the
length (measured in the direction of the second digitized point)
and the width you enter in the Length and Width fields. Any
points digitized inside the limits of the box are discarded. The
first point digitized outside the box’s limits is kept. The box is
then centered at the newly kept point, and the last discarded
point is added back in. The new orientation of the box is defined
by the these last two points, and the process is repeated.

14.4.3 Testing Communication with the Digitizer

The white area to the right of the Button Mapping list control
represents the digitizing tablet. The tablet height, width and resolution,
displayed below the white rectangle, represent what you previously
configured with the Wintab driver. As you move the digitizer cursor
across the tablet, you'll see the crosshairs move across the tablet on the
screen.
To test the digitizer for point mode:

1. Click .
2. Pick random locations on the digitizing tablet, pressing the
digitize button at each location. A line on the screen will form
connecting each digitized point.
To test the digitizer for stream mode:

1. Click .
2. Press and hold the digitize button while tracing a line on the
tablet. A line on the screen will reflect the movements of the
digitizing cursor.
The area immediately below the Button Mapping list control displays
the name of the configured digitizer and the version of the Wintab
driver. As you map cursor buttons to various commands, the mapping
information will also be displayed in this area.
14.5 Project Settings

Project Settings gives you various options to customize your projects.
Once these options are set, they will act as the default functions for
your projects. Following is an explanation of the options you have in
the Project Settings dialog box.

14.5.1 Coordinates
Coordinates lets you set up your coordinate system in a way that is
easy for you to use. Choose the display system you use the most.
Once you have chosen the display system, choose either a field or
relative reference-point system.
14.5.2 Confirm
The Confirm options control common message boxes. The message
will appear if a check is in its check box.
Cancel brings up a confirmation box when you make changes in a
dialog box then cancel out of it.
Delete brings up a confirmation box when information is going to be
deleted.
Overwrite brings up a confirmation box when information is going to
be overwritten.

14.5.3 Grid Smoothing

Grid Smoothing is the process of adjusting calculated elevations to
make the surface model look more realistic. Select High for a
smoother image. Please be aware that the higher the smoothing the
longer it takes to generate the grid. The recommended setting is
Medium.
14.5.4 Subgrade Adjustments Under Pads

The Subgrade Adjustments Under Pads option lets you choose
whether or not subgrade adjustments will affect the subgrade elevation
under pads and sloping areas.
Individually Protect Pads and Sloping Areas sets SiteWork to allow
you to determine whether subgrade adjustments will affect each
individual pad and sloping area. Checking this box prevents subgrade
adjustments from affecting individual pads and sloping areas. When
this option is cleared, you can choose from the following two options:
Affect subgrade makes SiteWork subgrade adjustments adjust
elevations under pads and sloping areas.
Do not affect subgrade makes SiteWork ignore subgrade adjustments
under pads and sloping areas when determining your subgrade
elevation. The thickness of a pad and sloping area is not a subgrade
adjustment, therefore the thickness will always adjust the elevation.
14.5.5 Units
Select the unit of measure you use most frequently, feet or meters. If
you have a drawing set in a different unit and you did not change the
units before you did the takeoff or imported it, SiteWork will convert
the drawing to the new units.

To change your preferences:

1. Select Tools / Options / Project Settings. The Project Settings
2. Select your options.
3. When you are finished changing your preferences, click OK.
14.5.6 Reset All

Reset All returns many of your preferences to the factory default
settings.
To reset your preferences in the surface names, default

drawing information, and project settings dialog boxes:
1. Select Tools / Options / Reset All. The figures below and on the
next page illustrate the default settings that SiteWork will use
when you select Reset All.


14.6 Choosing What to Show or Hide

You can show and hide the toolbar, status bar, and any of the data
types in the Surface Data screen.
14.6.1 Toolbar
The toolbars in SiteWork provide you with quick mouse access to
many tools used in the program. SiteWork has a toolbar for the Surface
Data screen and for each of the report screens. They are located just
under the menu bar on each screen. If you place your cursor over a
button in a toolbar, the button name appears below the button.
To show or hide the toolbar, select View / Tool Bar.
14.6.2 Status Bar

The status bar contains information about your drawing. It is located
at the bottom of the program screen.
To see or hide the status bar, select View / Status Bar.
14.7 Group Conversion Factors

SiteWork reports material quantities in cubic yards or cubic meters. If
you want your volumes converted into a different unit of measure, use
Edit Conversions to set up a list of conversion factors for each Group
you have already named. The results of each conversion will appear in
the Material Summary report.

To set up or change your conversion table:

1. Select Tools / Options / Conversions settings. The Group
Conversion Factor Edit dialog box appears (below).
2. To choose the name of the group to which you want to apply a

conversion factor, select the name of the group in the Group list.
3. To create or change the conversion factor, enter a new
conversion factor in the Factor field. The number can be in
decimal or scientific format.
4. To create or change the units, double-click in the Units edit box,
and type in the new units name.
5. To remove the conversion factor and units, click Delete.
6. If you are setting up the conversion factor for the group for the
first time, click Add.
7. If you are changing the conversion factor for the group, click
Update.
8. To edit another group, repeat steps 2-7.


This chapter has given you step-by-step instructions on how to
customize your SiteWork. See Chapter 15, Math Tools to learn how to
use Math Tools, SiteWork’s quick count, area, and length calculator.
See Chapter 16, Using SiteWork’s Calculators to learn how to use
SiteWork’s other calculators.

CHAPTER
15
Math Tools 15
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q Starting Math Tools
Q Inputting data
Q Zooming
Q Seeing results
Q Outputting the data or the results
Q When you are finished with a Math Tools session
Q Customizing Math Tools
Math Tools 15
15.1 Introduction
Math Tools is a planimeter tool that is included with Paydirt SiteWork.
It lets you quickly calculate areas, counts, and lengths. It lets you
import drawing information and the current surface from SiteWork as
a backdrop. It brings over group information from SiteWork. You can
enter data either with your digitizer or with your mouse. Once you are
finished entering data, Math Tools produces a professional-looking
report that displays all of your areas, counts, and lengths and their
totals.
Math Tools Help can help you use Math Tools more efficiently. All of
Math Tools’ primary screens and dialog boxes have a help button.
Each help button will bring up an online help screen that explains what
the option can do and tells you how to do what you want. This
program also has context-sensitive help.
15.2 Starting Math Tools

You have two options when it comes to starting Math Tools. You can
start Math tools from:
• SiteWork's plan data window.
• SiteWork's project screen.
No matter how you start Math Tools, it starts in Digitize mode. You
can either digitize in your data or you can use your mouse to enter
data.
15.2.1 Starting Math Tools from SiteWork’s Plan Data Window

When you start Math Tools from SiteWork’s Data window, the Math
Tools project is saved with current SiteWork drawing, so simple count,
length and area data can be retained for a particular drawing and
reopened from that drawing. For these projects, the current surface's
data can be displayed as a backdrop in Math Tools.

15 Math Tools
To start Math Tools from SiteWork's plan data window:

1. While in the data window, select Tools / Math Tools. Math Tools
starts and the Import into Math Tools dialog box appears
(below).
2. If you want to use a previously saved Math Tools file, select it

from the Filename list. To create a new Math Tools project,
enter a new name in the Filename list. Only Math Tools projects
created while in the current drawing are available to open.
3. If you want to use your mouse to store your data or you just
want a backdrop of what you are digitizing, select your
backdrop options.
Select the options you want to include by checking the
appropriate boxes. If you want all or most of the options
selected, click All, then clear the options you don’t want to
include.
If you want to choose your options individually, select them one
at a time.
If you want to digitize from the drawing you are currently using,
make sure Use current drawing information is selected.
If you want to set up a new scale, clear the Use current drawing
information check box.
4. Click OK.

Math Tools 15
Note – In this dialog box, Cancel closes Math Tools.

5. If you selected none of the options, the Math Tools Setup dialog
6. Enter the name of your Math Tools project in the File name
field. The name will appear on printed reports.
7. To set the horizontal scale, select the Scale value option and
enter the scale value in the adjacent field.
OR
To set the horizontal scale using Known distance:
a. Select the Known distance option.
b. Carefully digitize the first and second points of the known
distance. The two points should be reasonably far apart to
increase accuracy.
c. Enter the physical distance between the two known points
8. Math Tools automatically copies the information to the vertical
scale. If your plan has a separate vertical scale, repeat step 7 for
the vertical scale.

15 Math Tools
9. Click OK. The data screen appears.

15.2.2 Starting Math Tools from SiteWork’s Project Window

When you close the data window before starting Math Tools, Math
Tools is a quick calculator independent of a SiteWork Drawing.
When you start Math Tools in this way, you must set up a scale before
you can store any data.
To start math tools from SiteWork's project window:

1. Select Tools / Math Tools. Click to start a new project, or
click to open an existing project. The Math Tools Setup
field. The name will appear on printed reports.
OR

Math Tools 15

increase accuracy.
the vertical scale.
5. Click OK. The data screen appears.
15.3 Entering Data

The Data screen is your data input screen. It is the screen you see
when you first start Math Tools. Use the data screen to store your
areas, counts, and lengths.
15.3.1 Entering Data Using Your Digitizer and Mouse

Math Tools opens in Digitize mode, but you can also store data using
your mouse. If you want to use your mouse to input data, make sure
you start Math Tools from the Data window and select the Into
Backdrop options you want to trace. Otherwise, you will have no
reference for storing your data and Math Tools will not let you use the
Mouse option.

15 Math Tools
To put Math Tools into mouse mode:

Click .
OR
Select Edit / Mouse Edit
You can enter data in one of two ways: by streaming points or by
digitizing/creating individual points.
You stream points when you press and hold the digitize button on your
cursor or your left mouse button and trace the lines you are inputting.
This method continuously creates new data points while you hold
down the button. When you are finished making the line, release the
digitize or left mouse button. You can stop in the middle of creating a
line and then continue creating the line as many times as you like, but
let go of the digitize or left mouse button when you stop.
You digitize individual points when you press and release the digitize
or left mouse button, move the cursor, press and release the digitize
button, and so on. This method creates a new data point at the location
of your cursor or mouse each time you press and release the digitize or
left mouse button.
Practice using these two methods in different situations to determine
when you should use each.

Math Tools 15
15.3.2 Storing Areas

Areas lets you store an area boundary so Math Tools can calculate the
area for you. You can store the data in digitize or mouse mode.
To store areas:
1. Click .
OR
Select Edit / Areas. The Area dialog box appears (below).
2. Enter a name for the area in the Name field. Enter the beginning
area number in the Start at field. Select a group for the area
from the Group list.
OR
Accept the defaults.
3. Click OK.
4. Digitize or use your mouse to input the area boundary. If you
make a mistake as you digitize, press the [Back-Space] key on
your keyboard or digitizer cursor to remove the last piece of
data you entered.
If you change your mind about what you are doing, press [Esc]
on your keyboard to remove the area(s) you have just entered.

15 Math Tools
5. When you are finished storing areas, press [Enter] on your

keyboard or digitizer cursor, and click Cancel.
If you want to store additional areas, do one of the following:
Press [Enter] on your keyboard or digitizer cursor. Math Tools
will close your entity for you. The Area dialog box appears
again. Repeat steps 2-5.
OR
Press [+] on your keyboard or digitizer cursor. Math Tools closes
your entity for you and increments the name. (For example, it
will complete area A-7 and let you start area A-8.) Continue
entering your areas.
15.3.3 Storing Counts

Counts lets you store count information so Math Tools can keep track
of them for you. You can input the data in digitize or mouse mode.
To store counts:
1. Click .
OR
Select Edit / Counts. The Count dialog box appears (below).

Math Tools 15
2. Enter a name in the Name field. Select a group from the Group
list.
OR
3. Click OK.
4. Digitize or use your mouse to store the counts. If you make a
mistake as you digitize, press the [Back-Space] key on your
keyboard or digitizer cursor to remove the last piece of data you
entered.
on your keyboard to remove the count(s) you have just entered.
Note – You cannot stream in count data.
5. When you are finished storing counts, press [Enter] on your
If you want to store additional counts, do one of the following:
Press [Enter] on your keyboard or digitizer cursor. The Count
dialog box appears again. Repeat steps 2-5.
OR
Press [+] on your keyboard or digitizer cursor. Math Tools
increments the name. (For example, it will complete count C-7
and let you start count C-8.) Continue storing your counts.

15 Math Tools
15.3.4 Storing Lengths

Lengths lets you store length information so Math Tools can calculate
distances for you. You can input the data in digitize or mouse mode.
To input lengths:
1. Click .
OR
Select Edit / Lengths. The Length dialog box appears (below).
2. Enter a name in the Name field. Select a group from the Group
list.
OR
3. Click OK.
4. Digitize or use your mouse to store the lengths. If you make a
mistake as you digitize, press the [Back-Space] key on your
keyboard or digitizer cursor to remove the last piece of data you
entered.
on your keyboard to remove the length(s) you have just entered.
5. When you are finished storing lengths, press [Enter] on your
If you want to store additional lengths, do one of the following:

Math Tools 15
Press [Enter] on your keyboard or digitizer cursor. The

Length dialog box appears. Repeat steps 2-5.
OR
Press [+] on your keyboard or digitizer cursor. Math Tools
increments the name. (For example, it will complete length
L-7 and let you start length L-8.) Continue storing your
lengths.
15.4 Editing Data

You can select objects to edit using your digitizer or your mouse.
Following are tips for selecting and editing data:
• To select an object, pick it with your left mouse button.
• To select multiple objects, press [Ctrl] while selecting. You can
selects objects of different types.
• To include all objects in a selection set, select Edit / Select All.
• To select objects crossing or inside a selection area, click one
corner of the selection area, then press and hold the left mouse
button while dragging the mouse to the other corner. Release the
left mouse button.
• Selected points are drawn as thick black boxes.
• Selected lines and area borders are drawn in thicker black lines.
Nodes are represented as black boxes.
• Count items are selected as a group. Math Tools highlights all
count items with the same name.
• Deselect objects by clicking on a black space anywhere in the
data window.
To delete all selected objects

Select Edit / Delete or press [Delete] on your keyboard.

15 Math Tools
To edit object colors, line and point styles:

1. Select the object(s) you want to change.
2. Select Edit / Properties
OR
Press [Alt]+[Enter]
OR
Press your right mouse button and select Properties from the
right-click menu.
3. You can change an object’s name if you select that object

individually. If you select multiple objects for editing, the Name
field will be disabled.
4. Change an object’s group by typing it in the Group field or
selecting a new group name from the Group list. You can
change the group for multiple selected objects.
5. Base the color of an object on the color of its group by selecting
Base color on group name.

Math Tools 15
6. Turn off the visibility of an object or objects by clearing the

Visible check box. Restore the visibility by selecting Edit/Select
All, then Edit / Properties and selecting Visible. The Visible
check box will display a light gray check if some of the selected
objects are not visible.
7. Turn off the visibility of the name of an object by clearing the
Show label check box. The Show label check box will display a
light gray check if the names of some of the selected objects are
not visible.
8. Click Color to open the Color dialog box and select a new
color.
9. Select a new point style from the Point style list. Choose from
an X, a square, a triangle, a circle, a double overlapping X, a
plus sign with dot in center, and a circle with cross in the
middle.
10. Select a new line style from the Line style list. Choose from
solid, short dash, long dash, short long short dash, and short
short long dash.
11. Select a fill style for lengths and to shade areas from the Fill
style list. Choose from no fill, horizontal line, vertical line, slant
left, slant right, vertical horizontal cross, angle cross and solid.
The hatch pattern will be drawn in the color of the object you
are hatching.
12. Click OK.
15.5 Zooming
Sometimes you may need to get a closer look at what you are doing.
Math Tools makes enlarging an area easy. You can zoom in, zoom out,
or zoom all.

15 Math Tools
15.5.1 Zoom In
Zoom In enlarges the display two times (2x) its original size.
To zoom in:
Click .
OR
15.5.2 Zoom Out

Zoom Out reduces the display two times (2x) its present size.
To zoom out:
Click .
OR
15.5.3 Zoom All

Zoom All resets the zoom so you can see all of the data.
To reset the view:

Click .
OR
Select View / Zoom All.
15.5.4 Refresh
Refresh erases then quickly redraws everything on the screen. Use
Refresh when you ant to make sure what you see of the screen is
exactly what you inputted.

Math Tools 15
To refresh the screen:

Click
OR
Press [F5].
OR
15.5.5 Mouse Zoom

Mouse Zoom resizes a specific area of the view to a larger view scale
using the mouse to define the corners of the area you want to enlarge.
To enlarge an area:
1. Select View/Zoom Window
OR
Click .
OR
Press [Ctrl]+[Z]
2. Press and hold the left mouse button while picking a corner of
3. Still pressing the left mouse button, drag the mouse to the
opposite corner of the area you want to enlarge and release. A
rectangular box will appear indicating the target area.
B Tip – Pressing [Ctrl] while rolling the mouse wheel or pressing [Ctrl] while
pressing the up or down arrow key lets you zoom in and out.

15 Math Tools
15.5.6 Pan
Pan shifts the contents of the screen from one position in the view
window to another.
To pan across the screen:

1. Click
OR
Select View / Pan.
2. Press and hold the left mouse button while dragging the mouse
to pan the data across the screen. Releasing the mouse button
ends the Pan command.
Note – If Math Tools determines that the drawing speed is too slow,
Pan will operate as a two-point pan. The data will be moved from the
location of the first pick to the location of the second pick.
B Tip – Rolling the mouse wheel up or down or pressing the up or down

arrow key will pan the screen up or down. Pressing [Shift] while rolling the
mouse wheel, pressing the left or right arrow key, or pressing [Shift] + the
up or down arrow key will pan the screen to the left or right.
15.6 Seeing Results

The Report screen is a compilation of all of Math Tools’ calculations.
It is the screen you go to when you are finished inputting your areas,
counts, and lengths.
Note – In Math Tools, the report screen is a view that is part of Math
Tools. If you click on the close button or if you click on File then Exit,
you will close Math Tools, not just the Report screen. Math Tools uses
the styles you have set up in SiteWork. For example, if your font for
your report printouts is small in SiteWork, it will be small in the Math
Tools report as well.

Math Tools 15
To switch from the data view to the report view:

Select the Report tab at the bottom of the Data view. The report
screen appears.
You can print the report, save it for use in your spreadsheet or
word processing package, or copy it to the clipboard.
To switch from the report view to the data view:

Select the Data tab at the bottom of the Report view. The data
view appears.

15 Math Tools
15.7 Outputting the Data or the Results
15.7.1 Saving the Report

Save As lets you save your report (not your data), so you can use it in a
spreadsheet program.
Note – You must be in the report screen to save your report.
To save your report:

1. Click .
OR
Select File / Save As. The Save As dialog box appears.
2. To select a different drive or directory:
a. Click to select the name of the new drive or directory.
b. If necessary, double-click the subdirectory names until you
have opened the correct drive or directory.
3. To create a new directory:
a. Click .
b. Enter the name of the new directory.
4. Enter the name of the file in the Name field.
5. Click OK.

Math Tools 15
15.7.2 Copying the Report

Copy copies your report to the clipboard, so you can paste the
information into another program.
To copy data:
1. Select Edit / Copy
OR
Press [Ctrl]+[C]
2. Start the program into which you want to paste the information.
3. Paste the copied information.
Note – Data is saved to the clipboard as an enhanced metafile,
allowing you to scale the image without degradation.
15.7.3 Exporting
You can export a MathTools report as an Excel file or as a text file.

15 Math Tools
To export a report:
1. Open the report view window.
2. Select File / Export. The Export As dialog box will appear.
3. Select a destination for your file by clicking the file folder icon
or selecting a directory from the Save in list.
4. Enter a file name in the File name field. Choose the type of file
you want to write from the Save as type list.
5. Click Save.
Note – All totals exported to Excel files will be translated as
equations.
15.7.4 Printing
You can print out either your data or your report. Use this command to
print a document. You may specify the range of pages to be printed,
the number of copies, the destination printer, and other printer setup
options.
Note – Math Tools will print whatever screen (data or report) you are
in. It will fit the data to the printed page.

Math Tools 15
To print:
1. Click .
OR
Press [Ctrl]+[P]
OR
Select File / Print. The Print dialog box appears.
2. Select a printer from the Name list.

3. Select a paper size from the Size list, and a tray source from the
Source list. Choose the Portrait or Landscape option.
4. Click Properties to make additional choices about printing,
specific to the type of printer you have selected.
5. Click OK.
Note – If your window zoom factor is greater than one, SiteWork
opens a dialog box to give you the option of printing the entire site or
the extents of the zoom window. Click Yes to print all data for the
project. Click No to print only the zoomed portion.

15 Math Tools
15.7.5 Print Preview

Use this command to display the active document as it would appear
when printed. When you choose this command, the main window will
be replaced with a print preview window in which one or two pages
will be displayed in their printed format.
To see a print preview:

Select File / Print Preview. The Print Preview dialog box
appears.
The print preview toolbar offers you the following options:

Print
Opens the print dialog box, to start a print job.
Next Page
Previews the next printed page.
Prev Page
Previews the previous printed page.
One Page / Two Page
Previews one or two printed pages at a time.
Zoom In
Enlarges the printed page.
Zoom Out
Shrinks the printed page.
Close
Returns from print preview to the editing window.

Math Tools 15
15.7.6 Page Setup

Use this command to set print margins, a drawing scale, select a
printer and other options.
To open Page Setup:

1. Select File / Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog box appears.
2. Enter the left, right, top and bottom margins for your printout in
the Left, Right, Top and Bottom fields.
3. To force the printout to fit on a single page, select the Fit to
page check box.
4. To set a drawing scale, clear the Fit to page check box and enter
a scale value in the Output scale field. If you want to print the
drawing at a scale of 50 feet per inch, enter a value of 50. If you
want to print the drawing at a scale of one centimeter on the
plan = 500 centimeters in real-world units, enter a value of 500.
5. Check Show title box to have the title block appear on the
printout. Check Show scale bar to have the scale bar appear on
the printout. If Show title bar is checked, Show scale bar will
always be checked. If Show title bar is cleared, Show scale bar
can be checked or cleared.
6. Click Printers to open the Print Setup dialog box (see page
page 395) and select your printer settings.

15 Math Tools
7. If you choose, you can click Fonts to open the Font dialog box
and select the font for your printout.
Select the font, font style, size and other options, then click OK.
8. Optionally, you can click Date to open the Date Format dialog
box to configure how the date will appear on your printout.
Select the format that reflects how you want the date to appear
in the report, then click OK.
9. Click OK to exit the Page Setup dialog box.

Math Tools 15
15.8 When you are Finished with a Math Tools Session

When you are finished with a project in Math Tools, you can start a
new session, clear your data, or exit Math Tools.
15.8.1 New Session

New lets you start a new Math Tools session without closing Math
Tools.
To start a new math tools session:

1. Click .
OR
Select File / New. The data from the old session is cleared and
the Math Tools Setup dialog box appears (below).
field. The name will appear in printed reports.

15 Math Tools
OR
increase accuracy.
the vertical scale.
5. Click OK.
Note – In this dialog box, Cancel takes you back to the last
Math Tools session.
15.8.2 Saving the Data

If you have launched Math Tools from the Tools menu, SiteWork
allows you to save data in Math Tools as a separate Math Tools
project. If you have launched Math Tools from the Surface Data
window, the Math Tools data is saved with the current drawing.
To save your math tools data:

1. Click .
OR
Select File / Save. If you have previously entered a filename,
SiteWork saves your file; otherwise, the Save As dialog box
appears (see the figure on the next page).
OR

Math Tools 15
Select File / Save As. The Save As dialog box appears (below).
Note – If Math Tools was launched from the Surface Data Window,
you will not be able to change the directory for the Math Tools project.
2. Enter a name in the File name field.
3. Click Save.
15.8.3 Clearing the Data

Delete All removes all the data you have inputted from the screen, but
keeps you in the current Math Tools session.
To delete all the data in your data screen:

Press [Delete] on your keyboard or digitizer cursor.
OR
Select Edit / Delete All.
Note – Any backdrop information and reference points (if any)
will stay on the screen.
15.8.4 Exiting Math Tools

Exit ends your Math Tools session. Use Exit when you are completely
finished using Math Tools.

15 Math Tools
To exit the program:

1. Select File / Exit. If you have not saved your data, a warning
2. To save your project, enter a filename in the File name field and
click Yes.

Math Tools 15
15.9 Customizing Math Tools

You can customize your areas, counts, lengths, toolbar, and status bar.
15.9.1 Changing the Display

The Display option lets you select what entities are displayed in the
data screen and their colors.
To change your display options:

1. Select View / Options. The Display Options dialog box appears
(below).
2. An entity appears in the data screen if its check box is selected.

Clear its check box to remove it from the data screen.
The Visible check box determines the visibility of your Area,
Counts, or Lengths. Select it to see the Areas, Lengths, or
Counts. Clear it to remove these entities from the screen.
The label is an ID you define when you create the entity. If the
check box is selected, you will be able to see the Areas,
Lengths, or Counts labels. If it is cleared, you won’t. If the
Visible check box is cleared, you will not be able to see the
label.

15 Math Tools
The symbol marks the points you digitize for your Areas,
Counts, and Lengths. If the Visible check box is cleared, you
will not be able to see the symbol.
When you click Color, Math Tools opens the Color dialog box.
You can select a color from the Basic Colors palette or from the
Custom Colors palette, or you can create your own color and
add it to the Custom Colors pallet. To select a color:
a. Click on the desired color for the element you chose in
either the Basic or Custom Colors group.
b. Click OK.
3. To change an entity’s color, select a new color from the adjacent
Color dialog box.
4. If you want SiteWork to assign colors to objects based on their
group, select the Base colors on group name check box.
Note – This assignment is to a default color scheme. You can
individually override the color of any object.
5. Click OK.

Math Tools 15
15.9.2 Displaying the Toolbar

The toolbar provides you with quick mouse access to many tools used
in the program. It is located just under the menu bar.
To view or hide the toolbar, select View / Tool Bar.
15.9.3 Displaying the Status Bar

The status bar contains information about your file. It is located at the
bottom of the program screen.
To view or hide the status bar, select View / Status Bar.
15.10Moving on in SiteWork
This chapter has given you step-by-step instructions on how to use
Math Tools, SiteWork’s quick count, area, and length calculator. See
Chapter 16, Using SiteWork’s Calculators to learn how to use
SiteWork’s other calculators. See Chapter 18, Troubleshooting for
troubleshooting information.

15 Math Tools

CHAPTER
16
Using SiteWork’s Calculators 16
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q About SiteWork’s Tools
Q Area Calculator
Q Haul Calculator
Q Trench Calculator
Q Windows Calculator
16.1 Introduction
SiteWork has an area calculator, a haul calculator, and a trench
calculator and gives you menu access to the Windows Calculator. This
chapter explains how to use SiteWork’s calculators.
16.2 About SiteWork’s Tools

If you select Tools, you can see that the menu lists six calculators:
CALCwork, Math Tools, Area, Haul, Trench, and Windows
Calculator.
CALCwork is an optional calculating tool that can be used alone or
with other Paydirt products. It can help you determine how much of
each material you will need for a job and how much the materials will
cost. CALCwork is an optional, separate program with its own
manual, so we will not be discussing it further in this manual.
We discussed Math Tools in Chapter 15, Math Tools, so we will not
discuss it in this chapter.
The Windows calculator comes with your Windows operating system.
SiteWork simply gives you access to it through the Tools menu. If you
need more information about the Windows calculator, please see your
Windows documentation.
The Area, Haul, and Trench calculators are useful tools for estimators
when calculating simple areas, haul routes, and trenches. When you
use these calculators, you input the data they need in their dialog
boxes. The calculators do not use the data you input in the Surface
Data screen.
16.3 Area Calculator

The Area Calculator calculates the area of a given rectangle, circle, or
trapezoid. It uses the units of measure you selected in the Preferences
menu.

To use the area calculator, select Tools / Area. The Area Calculator
16.3.1 Calculating a Rectangular Area
To calculate the area of a rectangle:

1. Enter the length of the first side in the A field
2. Enter the length of the second side in the B field
3. Press [Tab]. The area is listed at the bottom of the dialog box.
4. To calculate another rectangular area, repeat steps 1-3.

16.3.2 Calculating a Circular Area
To calculate the area of a circle:

1. Select the Circle option.
2. Enter the radius of the circle in the R field.

4. To calculate the area of another circle, repeat steps 2-3.

16.3.3 Calculating a Trapezoidal Area
To calculate the area of a trapezoid:

1. Select the Trapezoid option.
2. Enter the length of the top of the trapezoid in the A field.

3. Enter the length of the bottom of the trapezoid in the B field.
4. Enter the length of the height of the trapezoid in the H field.
6. To calculate the area of another trapezoid, repeat steps 2-5.
16.3.4 Printing the Area Calculation
To print a dialog box with all of the area information:

1. Press [Print-Screen].
2. Open a word processor program (such as Word).

3. Press [Ctrl] +[V].

4. Print the document. Follow the word processor's instructions
for printing.
5. When you are finished printing areas, click Done.
16.4 Haul Calculator

The Haul Calculator computes production rates based on distance,
speed and time. Use this calculator to determine the production rate
for a task.
16.4.1 To Calculate a Haul:

1. Select Tools / Haul. The Haul Calculator dialog box appears
(see figure, next page).
2. Enter the information in the fields in the dialog box.
Note – SiteWork bases its calculations on whether you chose
Metric or English in the Preferences menu.
As you enter the Loaded and Return haul information, the Total
Distance, Loaded Time, Return Time, and Number of Trips per
Hour calculations appear.
As you enter the Time information, the Total Time information
appears.
As you enter the units hauled per vehicle information, the Units
Hauled per Hour per Vehicle information appears.

As you enter the number of haul vehicles, the Production Rate

per Hour appears.
3. To remind yourself of the units you are hauling, select a unit

from the Haul Units list.
4. You can make as many haul calculations as needed.
5. To print the dialog box with all of the haul information:
a. Press [Print-Screen].
b. Open a word processor program such as WordPad.
c. Press [Ctrl] + [V].
d. Print the document. (Follow the word processor's
instructions for printing.)
6. When you are finished making haul calculations, click Done.

16.5 Trench Calculator

The Trench Calculator lets you calculate trench volumes.
To Calculate a Trench:
1. Select Tools /Trench. The Trench Calculator dialog box appears
(below).
Note – Your Trench Calculator dialog box may look a little different
than Figure 16.5.
2. To change the label of a trench layer, enter the new name in the
layer's label field.
3. To enter a depth for a layer, enter the depth in the layer’s depth
field. As you press [Tab] to move to the next field, the Total
Depth display updates.

Note – Any layer can be zero except for the fifth and sixth
layers, which must be greater than or equal to ½ of the pipe's
Outside Diameter.
4. Enter the outside diameter of the pipe in the Pipe OD field.
5. Enter the length of the trench in the Total Length field.
6. There are three methods for entering slope and width
information. Choose one of the methods, follow the
instructions, then go to step 9. To set up the Trench Calculator
for a different method, click Preferences.
Method 1: Trench widths are known.
a. Enter the width of the widest part of the trench in the top
width field. Press [Tab].
b. Enter the width of the top of the pipe window, and press
[Tab].
c. Enter the width of the bottom of the pipe window, and
press [Tab].
Method 2: Trench slopes are known and you want to enter
your slopes by ratio.
a. Enter the width of the bottom of the pipe window in the
only active width field. Press [Tab].
b. Enter the Run part of the slope ratio, and press [Tab].
c. Enter the Rise part of the slope ratio, and press [Tab].
d. Repeat steps b and c for the second slope. SiteWork
calculates your trench widths.

Method 3: Trench slopes are known and you want to enter

your slopes by percent.
a. Enter the width of the bottom of the pipe window in the
only active width field. Press [Tab].
b. Enter the percent slope, and press [Tab].
c. Enter the percent slope for the second slope field, and press
[Tab]. SiteWork calculates your trench widths.
You should be able to see the Trench Volumes at the bottom of the
dialog box. If you can't, press [Tab].
To print the dialog box with all of the trench information:

1. Press [Print-Screen].
2. Open a word processor program such as WordPad.
3. Press [Ctrl] + [V].
4. Print the document. Follow the word processor's instructions
for printing.
5. To calculate another trench, repeat steps 1-4.
6. When you are finished calculating trench volumes, click Done.
16.6 Windows Calculator

The Windows Calculator looks and works like a hand-held calculator.
To bring up the Windows calculator, select Tools / Windows
Calculator.
For more information on the Windows Calculator, see your Windows
documentation.


This chapter has given you step-by-step instructions on how to use
SiteWork’s calculators. See Chapter 18, Troubleshooting for
troubleshooting information.

CHAPTER
17
Converting from DOS to
Windows 17
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q Converting your DOS-version projects
Converting from DOS to Windows 17
17.1 Introduction
If you have an earlier version of SiteWork that runs on a Windows
operating system, your new SiteWork will read your old project files
with no problem. However, if you have the DOS version of SiteWork
and you want to use your old project files, you will need to convert
them to the SiteWork for Windows format. This chapter explains how
to convert your old DOS projects.
You need to use this chapter only if you are converting from DOS-
based SiteWork to Windows-based SiteWork.
17.2 Converting Your DOS-Version Projects

The Paydirt Conversion Utility is a separate program that resides in
your Paydirt Group. Use this utility to convert your old projects from
the DOS version of SiteWork to SiteWork 4. You must have the DOS
version of SiteWork installed on your computer for this conversion
program to work. If your projects were created in SiteWork 3 or
higher, you do not need to use this program. You can simply open the
project in your new SiteWork program.
C Warning – Convert copies, but does not delete, your DOS project. You
cannot use this utility under Windows NT.
To convert your projects that were created in the DOS

version of SiteWork:
To start the program in Windows 95/98:
1. Click Start.
2. Select Programs / Paydirt / Convert. The Paydirt Conversion
dialog box appears (see the first figure, next page).
3. Select Convert / SiteWork. The SiteWork Conversion dialog box
appears (see the second figure, next page).

4. Enter the complete path name of your DOS SiteWork directory

(e.g., c:\SiteWork).
5. Select the SiteWork file from the From list.

If the directory that you specified does not exist, a message box
appears. This message tells you that your installation directory
is invalid. Click OK, and retype in the correct path.
Note – Remember, you MUST have the DOS version of SiteWork
on your computer for this program to convert your files.
6. Select the project you wish to convert. Press [Tab].

Converting from DOS to Windows 17
7. Enter the complete path name of your Windows SiteWork

directory including the new project ID (e.g.,
c:\spectra\data\projid). The project ID must be 8 characters or
less.
8. Click OK. The conversion process begins.
If the directory you specified does not exist, a message box
appears, telling you that your specified directory does not exist.
Click OK to have a directory created and the conversion process
continued.
9. To exit the program, select Convert / Exit.

This chapter has given you step-by-step instructions on how to convert
your SiteWork for DOS projects to SiteWork for Windows projects.
See Chapter 18, Troubleshooting for step-by-step instructions on
troubleshooting SiteWork for Windows problems.


CHAPTER
18
Troubleshooting 18
In this chapter:
Q Introduction
Q Problems when digitizing
Q Problems when importing
Q Problems when running or printing reports
Q Problems with the program’s index
Q Other problems
Troubleshooting 18
18.1 Introduction
As with any computer program, SiteWork may give you errors from
time to time. This chapter covers the most commonly-asked-about
problems users experience with SiteWork for Windows.
If these solutions do not correct your problem or if your problem is not
listed here, please contact Paydirt Software Solutions.
18.2 Problems When Digitizing
I was digitizing and I toggled into mouse mode. Now I can’t

toggle back into digitize mode.
This problem is usually caused by a cursor mapping problem.
Solution:
1. Select Tools / Options / Cursor Remap. The Cursor Remap
dialog box appears.
2. Verify that the button on the digitizer cursor you are using is
mapped to Toggle. (See Chapter 14, Customizing Paydirt
SiteWork, Remapping Cursor Buttons, page 362 for detailed
instructions on how the cursor is set up and on remapping your
cursor.)
3. If the toggle button is not mapped correctly:
a. Change the toggle button map to the correct button. Click
OK.
b. Return to the Surface Data window and verify that the
toggle button works properly.
4. If the toggle button is mapped correctly and you are still having
problems toggling:

18 Troubleshooting
a. Exit SiteWork.
b. Go into the Wintab setup.
c. Make sure the toggle button is mapped to middle double-
click.
d. Restart SiteWork.
e. Return to the Surface Data screen and verify that the toggle
button now works properly.
I was digitizing, but now the toolbar is all grayed out.

This problem is probably caused when you accidentally get into
mouse mode.
Solution:
1. Press [Enter] on the keyboard.
2. If the data type buttons are still disabled:
a. Exit SiteWork.
b. Restart SiteWork.
3. Set up for what you were digitizing again and click OK.
4. Continue digitizing.
5. If you could not complete an enclosed entity properly when the
error occurred, delete what you previously digitized. (See
Chapter 7, Editing Data: Changing What You’ve Done,
Deleting Data, page 166 for step-by-step instructions on how to
delete.)
The program accepts my reference points, but it will not

allow me to input any data.
This problem can be caused by using the wrong button to digitize or
having the wrong button mapped as the digitizer button.

Troubleshooting 18
Solution:
1. Make sure you are using the button that is set up to digitize as
the digitize button. Most right-handed people use the upper
leftmost button on your digitizer cursor (typically the [7] or [D]
button).
2. To check and/or change the digitize button:
a. If you are in the Surface Data screen, select Surface /
Close.
b. If you do not know how to remap your digitizer cursor, see
the Chapter 14, Customizing Paydirt SiteWork, Remapping
Cursor Buttons, page 362.
c. If you know the basics of how to remap your cursor, click
Preferences, then click Cursor Remap. The Cursor Remap
d. If you want to use the upper leftmost button and the

digitize button is set to something other than zero, select
button zero from the Digitize Button list.
e. If you want to use a different button as the digitize button,
make sure the button listed in the Digitize Button list is the
correct button for you.

18 Troubleshooting
f. When you are finished checking and/or changing your

digitize button, click OK.
My digitizer is not responding at all.

If your digitizer is not responding, it could mean that Wintab is not
running or your digitizer board is not receiving power.
Solution:
1. Make sure Wintab is running. If you have just installed
SiteWork for the first time, you need to install a Wintab driver
for your digitizer.
2. Exit SiteWork and test whether you can use the digitizer as a
mouse. If the digitizer works as a mouse, restart SiteWork.
3. If the digitizer is still nonfunctional, exit SiteWork and shut
down your system. Check all connections to tablet.
4. Turn your PC back on and see if the digitizer functions as a
mouse. If it does, try SiteWork again. If the digitizer is still
nonresponsive, contact technical support.
18.3 Problems When Importing
I imported a .DXF file (or a .DWG file) and all I see on my

screen is a little spot.
Sometimes engineers use a data type as a benchmark. In most cases,
this point has a coordinate value assigned to it that is miles away from
the actual site.
Solution:
1. Try to zoom in on the point that is out of bounds.
2. Select Edit / Mouse Edit.

Troubleshooting 18
3. Select Edit / Delete / Elevation Points. Try to delete the point.

4. Do a file check to reset the drawing. Select Tools / Check
Drawing Files / Full.
5. Delete the surface into which you imported the file.
6. Use or have someone use a CAD program to remove the point
from the file.
OR
Use QuickPoint to remove the point from the file. (If you own
QuickPoint, see Chapter 5, Importing Data, QuickPoint,
page 116 and the documentation that came with your
QuickPoint to learn how to use QuickPoint and SiteWork
together.)
7. Import the edited file.
18.4 Problems When Running or Printing Reports
When I try to print, I get the following error message:

“Floating point error: Divide by 0.”
The cause of this problem is unknown.
Solution:
Setup dialog box appears. Click Fonts. The Font dialog box
appears.
2. Select a new font size, and click OK.
3. Try printing again.
4. If desired, change the font size back to what it was before.
5. If you continue to get the same error message, call technical
support. They will help you to correct the problem.

18 Troubleshooting
I set my report up correctly, but when I click on OK in the

report setup dialog box, I get returned to the Project
screen.
This problem is caused by the grid space per surface number being too
large.
Solution:
1. Select Edit / Drawing / Information.
2. Check the Grid Space per Surface value. Technical support
recommends that this value range from 100 kb to 200 kb.
3. Click OK.
4. Try running the report again.
The graphical part of my report prints, but the text report

does not.
See below.
The program acts as if it printed my text report, but nothing

came out on the printer.
This problem is usually caused by a printer driver setting found in
most inkjet printers.
Solution:
1. From the report window, select Project / Print. The Print dialog
box appears.
2. Click Properties. The print setup dialog box appears.
3. Use the documentation that came with your printer and with
Windows to find the graphics print option. If it is set to
Automatic, change it to Manual.
4. Click OK to close the print setup dialog box.

Troubleshooting 18
5. Try printing the text report again.
The program locks up when I try to run the Project

Summary report.
This problem can be caused by a corrupt AOI or a corrupt entity.
Solution:
1. Run an Areas and Volumes report.
2. If you can run the Areas and Volumes report without getting this
problem:
a. The error is due to a corrupt AOI (the AOI being used to
calculate report). Close out of the report screen.
b. Go to the Data window.
c. Delete the AOI you were using to calculate the Project
Summary report.
d. Re-input the AOI. Make sure you digitize it in a counter
clockwise fashion.
If you have the same problem with the Areas and Volumes
report:
a. The error is due to a corrupt entity (e.g. pad, subgrade
adjustment, or sloping area). Restart SiteWork.
b. Make a copy of the project.
c. Working from the copy, go into the surface data screen, and
delete one of the entities.
d. Run the Project Summary report.
e. If the problem occurs, restart SiteWork and repeat steps c
and d. If you run out of entities on the surface, switch to
another surface and repeat steps c and d.
If the problem does not occur, you have found the corrupt
entity. Open the original project.

18 Troubleshooting
f. Go into the surface where you found the corrupt entity.

g. Delete the corrupt entity.
h. Re-input the entity. Make sure you digitize it in a counter
clockwise fashion.

Troubleshooting 18
18.5 Other Problems
My data looks like a little dot.
The program is not updating my volumes after I make a

change to my data.
Normally, SiteWork automatically double-checks your files to make
sure the minimum and maximum X and Y values reflect the data that
is on your current drawing. However, if you notice your volumes do
not update correctly to changes you have made or if your data looks
like a little dot, you can force SiteWork to do this check using Check
Files.
To check your files:

Select Tools / Check Drawing Files / Quick.
I am getting all kinds of error message boxes.

Sometimes files can become corrupt. You can fix certain corrupt files
by doing a full check files.
To do a full check files:

Select Tools / Drawing Check Files / Full.

This chapter has given you step-by step instructions for SiteWork’s
troubleshooting tools. Be sure to keep this manual in a handy place
where you can refer to it as needed.

18 Troubleshooting

Reader Comment Form
Paydirt SiteWork User Guide March, 2003
Part Number 0320-0700 Revision: B
We appreciate your comments and suggestions for improving this publication.

Which Trimble product do you use? _____________________________________________
What do you use your Trimble product for? _______________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Please circle a response for each of the statements below:
1 = strongly agree 2 = agree 3 = neutral 4 = disagree 5 = strongly disagree
The manual is well organized. 1 2 3 4 5
I can find the information I want. 1 2 3 4 5
The information in the manual is accurate. 1 2 3 4 5
I can easily understand the instructions. 1 2 3 4 5
The manual contains enough examples. 1 2 3 4 5
The examples are appropriate and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5
The layout and format are attractive and useful. 1 2 3 4 5
The illustrations are clear and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5
The manual is: too long just right too short
Please answer the following questions:
Which sections do you use the most? ____________________________________________
What do you like best about the manual? _________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
What do you like least about the manual? _________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Optional:
Name _____________________________________________________________________
Company __________________________________________________________________
Address____________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Telephone ____________________________ Fax
____________________________________
Please mail to the local office listed on the back cover or to Trimble Navigation Limited, 645
North Mary Avenue, Post Office Box 3642, Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3642. Alternatively, e-mail
your comments and suggestions to ReaderFeedback@trimble.com. All comments and
suggestions become the property of Trimble Navigation Limited.
Index
Numerics archiving and restoring your
projects 347
3-D views
archiving your projects 347–348
options 214–217
Area calculator 409
prepare your bid 283
how to use 410–413
report 212–219
printing 412
use this report to 282
Area input, Math Tools 381
verify takeoff accuracies 283
Areas and volumes
options 260–262
prepare your bid 293
A
report 257
About use this report to 292
changing what you’ve done 155 verify takeoff accuracies 293
exporting 301 Areas of interest 51
manual xxi–xxii changing 161–165
online help xxii–xxiv copying 83–84
reports 281 creating 149
SiteWork xix daylight AOI 149
tools 409 deleting 171
Tutorial xxii digitizing 51–53, 147
Add drawing 338–340 exclusion AOI 149
Add surface 337–338 when to use 147
Adjust final surface 272 when you have no AOIs 147–148
Advantages Areas report 225
to digitizing 45 Arguing a point 282
to exporting 301 Arranging
to importing 99 icons 206
Affect subgrade 367 windows 205
Archive 26–27

Index
B memo 176
point data 156–157
Backing up project 26–27
points on line of data 158–159
Balance to value 272
preferences 368
Balanced surface, creating 274
project information 182
Boreholes 142
report 197
changing 156
report setup 320–323
deleting 166–168
surface information 179–180
digitizing 74–75
surface names defaults 355
when to use 142
surfaces 35
what you’ve done 155
Choosing what to show or hide 370
C
Clearing the data, Math Tools 401
Calculating Clipboard
between known points 68 copying to 204
circular area 411 Clipboard, copy to 40
rectangular area 410 Closing
substrata volumes 75 reports 206–207
trapezoidal area 412 Color 198–201, 359
Calculator Color bar 194
area 409 hide 194
haul 413 uncover 194
trench 415 Company information 323
windows 417 default 358
Can’t Confirm on 366
input data 428–430 Connected data
toggle 427–428 digitizing 63
Cancel 366 Contents 6
Changing Contour lines
conversion table 371 abruptly-ending 136
default drawing information 354 and surfaces 133
display, Math Tools 403–404 changing 158
drawing information 180–181 copying to an enclosed entity 85–
drawing scale 182–185 86
entities 161–162 copying to an offset 87–89
font 329–331 deleting 169–170
general information 179–182 digitizing 63–66, 125, 125–137

Index
when to use 125 deleting digitized cross

Control points 92, 150 sections 256
Conversion table digitizing 255
changing 371 options 252–254
Converting prepare your bid 292
DOS-version projects 421–423 printing 325
introduction 421 report 250
your projects 421–423 use this report to 291
Coordinate points 48 verify takeoff accuracies 291
Coordinates 366 viewing 255–256
digitizing 46 Cursor remap 362–363
exporting 302 Cursor, using 46
importing 100 Customizing
Copy mode 33 Math Tools 403
Copying SiteWork 353
AOI 83–84 Cut cells 201
drawing 174 hide 201
enclosed entities 76 show 201
line data 84–86 Cut stake points 150
pads 79–80 changing 156
project 175 deleting 166–168
report, Math Tools 393 digitizing 72–73
set up to copy 76 generating 229
sloping areas 81–82, 146 Cut/fill locations
subgrade adjustments 77–78, 145 areas report 225
surface 172–173 cut/fill areas 224
surfaces, drawings, and cut/fill map 222
projects 172–175 options 226–233
to the clipboard 204 prepare your bid 285
Count input, Math Tools 382 report 220
Creating staking report 223
areas of interest 149 take information to field 286
balanced surface 274 use this report to 284
memo 176 verify takeoff accuracies 284
new drawings 337
new surfaces 337
Cross sections

Index
D lines of data 169–170

Math Tools 401
Data input in Math Tools 379
point data 166–168
Data properties 109, 113
setting up to delete 166
Data type
unwanted files 343
areas of interest 33
Device, sending to 305–309
boreholes 34
Digitizer cursor, using 46
contour lines 33
Digitizing 47
control points 34
areas of interest 51, 147
cut stake points 34
contour lines 63–66, 125
elevation points 33
coordinates 46
pads 33
cross sections 255
sloping areas 34
cursor 46
sloping lines 33
cut stake points 71–73
subgrade adjustments 33
digitizer is not responding 430
Data types
elevation points 70–71, 142
how data affects the grid 121–125
enclosed entities 51, 143
introduction 121
Introduction 45
Date 322
line data 63
format 358
pads 56, 147
Default
point data 69
company information 358
point mode 47
date format 358
problems 427
drawing information 353
restart if disconnected 111
margins 356
sloping areas 58, 146
report 356
sloping lines 67–69, 138
setting 353
stream mode 47
surface names 354
subgrade adjustments 53, 143–
Delete 366
145
drawing 344–345
surfaces 45
project 346
wrong scale 183
surface 343–344
your experience 46
Delete mode 33
Digitizing method
Deleting
calculate between known
data 166
points 68
digitized cross sections 256
known elevations 69
entities 171
slope percent 61–62
files from a total station 108

Index
three elevation points 60–61 Error messages 435

Displaying Excavation area 277
changing in Math Tools 403 Excavation volume 277
status bar, Math Tools 405 Exiting
tool bar, Math Tools 405 Math Tools 401
Do not affect subgrade 367 SiteWork 23
DOS projects, converting 421 Exporting 302
Drawing about 301
adding 338–340 advantages 301
changing default information 354 and coordinates 302
copying 174 and surfaces 301
default information 353 file types 302
delete 344 information 302
elevation warning limits 180 sending to a device 305–309
information 180 summary 305
memo 176 to a file 311–313
name 180 using the digitizer 310
open 342 Exporting to Terramodel 303
save as 174
Drawing scale 180
changing 182–185 F
Field reference points 48
Field to relative 48
E
File
Editing exporting 311
CAD files 100 importing 111–115
raw data 109 File types, importing 100
surface data 155 Fill cells 202
Elevation points hide 202
changing 156 show 202
deleting 166–168 Filled grid 199
digitizing 70–71, 142 Filter settings 363
when to use 142 Fit to page 321
Enclosed entities Font 330, 331
copying 76 default 356
Entity thickness warning limits 180
Equivalent references 110

Index
G I
General information Importing 100
changing 179–182 a file 100, 111–115
Generating advantages 99
balanced surface 274 before importing 102
cut stake points 229 coordinates 100
Gray scale 198 file types 100
Grid from a total station 105–111
cut cells 201 problems 430
display grid 201 receive field data 107
fill cells 202 surfaces 99
net cells 202 using Terramodel 101–105
setting up display 201 wrong scale 183
smoothing 367 Individually lock 367
Grid cell values Information
argue a point 288 default drawing 353
options 237–238 drawing 180
report 234 project 181
use this report to 286 surface 179
verify takeoff accuracies 287 Inputting
Grid cell volumes areas of interest 51, 147
argue a point 289 areas, Math Tools 381–382
options 242–243 contour lines 63, 125
report 239 counts, Math Tools 382–383
use this report to 288 cut stake points 71
verify takeoff accuracies 288 elevation points 70, 142
Grid spacing 180 enclosed entities 143
Group conversion factors 370 lengths, Math Tools 384–385
pads 56, 147
problems 428–430
H sloping areas 58, 146
Haul calculator 413 sloping lines 67, 138
how to use 413–414 subgrade adjustments 53, 145
Hide 370 Installing
SiteWork 8
Wintab driver 8–9

Index
K print setup 397

printing 394
Known elevations 69
refresh 388
reports 390
save as 392
L
saving the data 400–401
Length input, Math Tools 384 seeing results 390
Line data 125 starting 375
digitizing 63 starting from the project
Line styles 359 window 378–379
starting from the surface data
window 375–378
M status bar 405
Managing tool bar 405
projects 337 Memo
reports 204 changing 176
Mapping creating 176
toggle button 12 drawing 176
Margins 321 project 176
default 356 surface 176
Math Tools Menu bar 190
changing the display 403–404 Mesh
copying the report 393 color grid, filled grid, or
customizing 403 none 199–200
delete all 401 color vs. gray scale 198
digitizing and mousing in 379– setting up display 198
380 Minimum requirements
display, changing 403–404 computing power 3–5
exiting 401 recommended requirements 5
inputting areas 381–382 Mode
inputting counts 382–383 change 33
inputting data 379 digitizing 33
inputting lengths 384–385 Mouse
introduction 375 difference between mouse and
new session 399–400 digitizer 94–95
outputting 392 edit 35
print preview 396 editing with 94

Index
zoom 37–38 report 197

Mousing in site balance 270–273
Math Tools 380 surface contours report 245–249
Multiple surface input 90 Output scale 321
how to use 90–91 Outputting data or results, Math
Multiple-page takeoff Tools 392
how to do 95–96 Overwrite 366
N P
Net cells 202 Pads 56
hide 202 changing 161–165
show 202 copying 79–80
New deleting 171
drawing 337 digitizing 147
project 19–23 set up to digitize pads 56–57
session, Math Tools 399–400 when to use 147
surface 337 Point data 142
None 199 changing 156–157
deleting 166
digitizing 69
O Point mode 47
online help xxii–xxiv Preferences
Opening changing 368
drawing 342 reset all 368
existing project 24–25 Preparing your bid 281
other reports 205 Print preview
surface 341 Math Tools 396
Options Printing
3-D view 214–217 any report except the cross
areas and volumes 260–262 sections report 324
cross section report 252–257 area calculation 412
cut/fill locations 226–233 cross sections 325–326
grid cell values report 237–238 in Math Tools 394
grid cell volumes report 242–243 in SiteWork 317
project summary 267 print a report 324
print preview 327–328

Index
print setup 332–333 options 267

print summary 317 prepare your bid 294
printer setup 356 report 263
problems running or printing send information to field 295
reports 431 use this report to 294
report setup defaults 320
reports 320, 324
select printer 322 Q
surface’s data 317–319 Quickpoint 116
Problems
digitizer is not responding 430
error messages 435 R
inputting data 428–430
other 435 Raw data, editing 109
toggling 427–428 Receiving field data 107–111
volumes 435 Recent file 24
when digitizing 427 Reference points 48–50
when importing 430 field reference points 48–50
when running or printing relative reference points 48–49
reports 431 Reference square 217
with program’s index 435 Refresh 39, 197
Project Math Tools 388
backing up 26–27 Relative reference points 48
converting DOS to windows 421– Relocate drawing 39–40
423 Remap cursor 362–363
copying 175 Removing files 343
delete 345 Report
information 181 3-D views 212–217
managing 337 about 211
memo 176 areas and volumes 257–262
new 20–23 arranging icons 206
notes 176–178 arranging windows 205
Open 24–25 changing 197
save as 175 closing 206–207
starting Math Tools 378–379 cross sections 250–257
working with 23 cut/fill locations 220–233
Project summary defaults 356–359

Index
grid cell values 234–238 surface 172

grid cell volumes 239–243 Saving
managing 204 data, Math Tools 400–401
Math Tools 391 text reports 203
menu bar 190 the report, Math Tools 392
opening other reports 205 Scale 321
options 197 Scale bar 322
printing 320, 324 Scale, wrong 183
problems 431 Scaling the view 219
project summary 263–267 Security key
resetting the view 219 attaching 6–7
rotating the view 218 See raw data 109
running report in same Seeing results, Math Tools 390
window 204–205 Selecting a data type 33–34
scaling the view 219 Send information to field 282
setup 355 Send to SiteWork 116
setup defaults 320 Sending
site balance 268–273 to a device 305–310
surface contours 244–249 Setting up
switching between windows 206 3-D views report 213–214
tabs 190 areas and volumes report 258–260
tool bars 191 controller 10
total volumes 275–276 cross sections report 250–252
translating the view 218 cut/fill locations report 220–221
Reset all 368–369 grid cell values report 234–236
Resetting the view 219 grid cell volumes report 239–241
Restore project summary report 263–266
restoring your projects 349–350 surface contours report 244–245
Rotating the view 218 to digitize 47
Running report in same window 204– Settings
205 stream filter 363–364
Show 370
Show options 359
S Site balance
Save as creating balanced surface 274
drawing 174 options 270–273
project 175 prepare your bid 296

Index
report 268 window 375–378

use this report to 295 new project 19–23
SiteWork SiteWork 19
about xix Station location 110
about reports 211, 281 Status bar 370
customizing 353 Math Tools 405
exiting 23 show or hide 370
exporting 301 Stream filter settings 363–364
features xx Stream mode 47
how it works xix Subgrade adjustments 53
introduction 3 changing 161–165
printing 317 copying 77–78, 145
starting 19 deleting 171
toggling 46 digitizing 53, 143–145
tools 409 set up to digitize subgrade
Slope percent 61–62 adjustments 53–55
Sloping areas 58 under pads 367
changing 159–160 when to use 145
copying 81–82, 146 Substrata data
deleting 171 boreholes 74–75
digitize sloping areas 58–60 entering 74
digitizing 146 Surface
when to use 146 adding 338
Sloping lines 169–170 copying 172–173
changing 158 delete 343
copying to an enclosed entity 85– information 179
86 memo 176
copying to an offset 87–89 open 341
digitizing 138–141 save as 172
set up to digitize sloping lines 67 Surface contours
when to use 138 options 245–249
Staking report 223 prepare your bid 290
Starting report 244
Math Tools 375 use this report to 290
Math Tools from the project verify takeoff accuracies 290
window 378–379 Surface data
Math Tools from the surface data editing 155

Index
setting up to change 156 in SiteWork 46

Surface Data window problems 427–428
closing 41 Tool ar
data types 33–34 cut/fill locations 192
edit modes 33 Tool bar 370
opening 31–32 3-D views 191
starting Math Tools 376–378 areas and volumes 193
working in 33 cross sections 192
Surface names cut/fill locations 191
changing defaults 355 grid cell volumes 192
default 354 Math Tools 405
Surfaces project summary 193
adding 36–37 report window 191
and contour lines 133 show or hide 370
and exporting 301 site balance 193
changing 35 surface contours 192
digitizing 45 total volumes 193
importing 99 Tools 409
opening 35–36 Total station
working with 35 deleting data from 108
Switching editing data 109
between parts of your project 341 sending data to 305
between windows 206 Total volumes
from field to relative 48 excavation area 277
excavation volume 277
report 275
T use this report to 296
Testing Translating the view 218
Wintab driver 11 Trench calculator 415
Text reports how to use 415–417
saving 203 Troubleshooting
Three elevation points 60–61 can’t input data 428
Title block 322 can’t toggle 427
To check or change your serial digitizer is not responding 430
properties 107 error messages 435
To see a 3-D report of your project 213 introduction 427
Toggling problems importing 430

Index
problems running or printing Y

reports 431
Your experience 46, 100
problems when digitizing 427
volumes not being updated 435
Tutorial xxii
Z
Zooming 37, 195, 385
U Math Tools 387
mouse zoom 37–38
Uninstalling SiteWork 14–15
zoom all 39, 196, 388
Units 367
zoom in 38, 195, 388
Units, english v. metric 27
zoom out 38, 196, 388
Using your digitizer cursor 46
V
Verify takeoff accuracies 281
Viewing
cross sections 255–256
Volumes, problems 435
W
Warnings 366
What information is exported? 302
Windows calculator 417
how to bring up 417
Windows Help xxiv
Wintab driver
installing 8–9
testing 11
Wrong scale
digitizing 183
importing 183

Index

Paydirt SiteWork User&#39;s Guide 5.2

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Paydirt SiteWork User&#39;s Guide 5.2

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Paydirt SiteWork

Paydirt SiteWork User Guide v

Working with the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

3 Using the Data Window

vi Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

Coordinates and Digitizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Paydirt SiteWork User Guide v ii

6 Learning About Data Types

viii Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

7 Editing Data: Changing What You’ve Done

8 Using Report Windows

Paydirt SiteWork User Guide ix

The Report Window Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

9 Running the Reports

x Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

Setting up the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xi

The Project Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

10 Using SiteWork to Your Advantage

xii Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

Using Cross Sections to Verify Takeoff Accuracies . . . . . . . 291

Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xiii

Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

13 Working with Paydirt SiteWork Projects

14 Customizing Paydirt SiteWork

xiv Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

Report Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xv

Zoom All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

16 Using SiteWork’s Calculators

xvi Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

Trench Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

17 Converting from DOS to Windows

Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xv ii

xviii Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

How SiteWork Works

Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xix

xx Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

How to Use SiteWork’s Documentation

About this manual

Type of User Chapters You Should Read

New User 1-16

Experienced User 1,3,6,8-10, 12,15

DOS to Windows User 1-17

User Having SiteWork 18

Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xxi

About the tutorial

About SiteWork’s online help

xxii Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

To get help on a menu option:

To get help in a dialog box:

To open the help system from the menus:

Paydirt SiteWork User Guide x xi ii

Click the Contents tab to view the contents page.

Figure A: The Help Topics dialog box.

To open Window's help:

xxiv Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

These manuals are also available in an electronic portable document

Paydirt SiteWork User Guide xx v

Helvetica Bold Identifies a software command button, or

xxv i Paydirt SiteWork User Guide

1.2 Minimum Requirements

1.2.1 Computing Power

Paydirt SiteWork User Guide 3

Paydirt SiteWork User's Guide 5.2

Paydirt SiteWork User's Guide 5.2